(simplify_unary_operation): Clean up some mode and size checks with
[gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 92, 93, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4 This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6 GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9 any later version.
10
11 GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14 GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18 the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21 #include "config.h"
22 /* Must precede rtl.h for FFS. */
23 #include <stdio.h>
24
25 #include "rtl.h"
26 #include "regs.h"
27 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
28 #include "flags.h"
29 #include "real.h"
30 #include "insn-config.h"
31 #include "recog.h"
32
33 #include <setjmp.h>
34
35 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
36 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
37 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
38 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
39
40 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
41 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
42 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
43 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
44 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
45 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
46 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
47
48 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
49 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
50 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
51
52 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
53 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
54 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
55 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
56 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
57 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
58 information recorded on an expression other than a register
59 is to keep it in a hash table.
60
61 Registers and "quantity numbers":
62
63 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
64 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
65 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
66 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
67 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
68 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
69 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
70 of as containing.
71
72 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
73 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
74
75 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
76 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
77
78 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
79 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
80 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
81
82 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
83 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
84 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
85
86 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
87 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
88 registers and must be in the same class.
89
90 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
91 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
92 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
93 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
94
95 Constants and quantity numbers
96
97 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
98 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
99 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
100
101 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
102 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
103 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
104
105 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
106 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
107 of qty_const.
108
109 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
110 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
111 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
112 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
113 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
114
115 Other expressions:
116
117 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
118 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
119 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
120 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
121 hash codes.
122
123 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
124 currently have equivalent values.
125
126 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
127 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
128 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
129 number, not the register number.
130
131 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
132 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
133 could be different as a result.
134
135 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
136 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
137 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
138 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
139
140 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
141 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
142 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
143 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
144 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
145 All expressions that refer to non-constant
146 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
147
148 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
149 containing references to that register, and only those,
150 must be removed.
151
152 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
153 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
154 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
155 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
156 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
157 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
158 within any one basic block.
159
160 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
161 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
162 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
163 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
164 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
165 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
166 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
167 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
168
169 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
170 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
171 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
172 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
173 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
174 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
175 the register.
176
177 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
178 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
179 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
180
181 Related expressions:
182
183 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
184 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
185 the table, the related expression with no constant term
186 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
187 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
188 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
189
190 /* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
191
192 static int max_reg;
193
194 /* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
195 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
196
197 static int max_qty;
198
199 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
200 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
201
202 static int next_qty;
203
204 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
205 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
206
207 static int *qty_first_reg;
208 static int *qty_last_reg;
209
210 /* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
211
212 static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
213
214 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
215 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
216 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
217 can also be entered here. */
218
219 static rtx *qty_const;
220
221 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
222 recorded in `qty_const'. */
223
224 static rtx *qty_const_insn;
225
226 /* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
227 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
228 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
229 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
230
231 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
232 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
233 static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
234
235 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
236 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
237 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
238
239 static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
240
241 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
242 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
243 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
244
245 static int *qty_comparison_qty;
246
247 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
248 /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
249 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
250 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
251
252 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
253 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
254 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
255 the constant should be interpreted. */
256
257 static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
258 static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
259 #endif
260
261 /* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
262
263 static rtx prev_insn;
264
265 /* Insn being scanned. */
266
267 static rtx this_insn;
268
269 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
270 of the register's current contents. */
271
272 static int *reg_qty;
273
274 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
275 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
276 value.
277
278 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
279
280 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
281
282 static int *reg_next_eqv;
283 static int *reg_prev_eqv;
284
285 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
286 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
287
288 static int *reg_tick;
289
290 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
291 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
292 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
293 existing in the hash table are invalid.
294 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
295 entered in the table. */
296
297 static int *reg_in_table;
298
299 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
300 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
301 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
302 expression in the table. */
303
304 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
305
306 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
307 by a CALL_INSN. */
308
309 static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
310
311 /* Two vectors of ints:
312 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
313 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
314 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
315
316 static int *all_minus_one;
317 static int *consec_ints;
318
319 /* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
320
321 static int cse_basic_block_start;
322
323 /* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
324
325 static int cse_basic_block_end;
326
327 /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
328 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
329 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
330
331 static int *uid_cuid;
332
333 /* Highest UID in UID_CUID. */
334 static int max_uid;
335
336 /* Get the cuid of an insn. */
337
338 #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
339
340 /* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
341 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
342
343 static int cse_jumps_altered;
344
345 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
346 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
347 subexpression. */
348
349 static int do_not_record;
350
351 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
352
353 /* Scratch rtl used when looking for load-extended copy of a MEM. */
354 static rtx memory_extend_rtx;
355 #endif
356
357 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
358 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
359
360 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
361
362 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
363 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
364
365 static int hash_arg_in_struct;
366
367 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
368 each recording one expression's information.
369 That expression is in the `exp' field.
370
371 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
372 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
373
374 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
375 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
376 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
377 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
378 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
379 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
380
381 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
382 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
383 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
384 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
385 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
386 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
387
388 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
389 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
390
391 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
392 (that differ by adding an integer).
393 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
394 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
395 chain is not useful.
396
397 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
398
399 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
400 a fixed address).
401
402 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
403
404 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
405 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
406 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
407 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
408
409
410 struct table_elt
411 {
412 rtx exp;
413 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
414 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
415 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
416 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
417 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
418 struct table_elt *related_value;
419 int cost;
420 enum machine_mode mode;
421 char in_memory;
422 char in_struct;
423 char is_const;
424 char flag;
425 };
426
427 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
428 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
429 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
430 #define NBUCKETS 31
431
432 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
433 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
434
435 #define HASH(X, M) \
436 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
437 ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS \
438 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
439
440 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
441 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
442 non-fixed hard regs.
443 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
444 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
445 #ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
446 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
447 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
448 || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N]) \
449 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
450 #else
451 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
452 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
453 || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
454 #endif
455
456 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
457 hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
458 of 0. Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
459 a cost of 2. Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
460
461 #define CHEAP_REGNO(N) \
462 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
463 || (N) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM \
464 || ((N) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER && (N) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER) \
465 || ((N) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
466 && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
467
468 /* A register is cheap if it is a user variable assigned to the register
469 or if its register number always corresponds to a cheap register. */
470
471 #define CHEAP_REG(N) \
472 ((REG_USERVAR_P (N) && REGNO (N) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) \
473 || CHEAP_REGNO (REGNO (N)))
474
475 #define COST(X) \
476 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
477 ? (CHEAP_REG (X) ? 0 \
478 : REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
479 : 2) \
480 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
481
482 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
483 into the `qty_...' variables. */
484
485 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
486
487 static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
488
489 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
490 but currently removed from the table. */
491
492 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
493
494 /* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
495
496 static int n_elements_made;
497
498 /* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
499 for functions previously processed. */
500
501 static int max_elements_made;
502
503 /* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
504 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
505 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
506
507 static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
508
509 /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
510 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
511 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
512 the insn. */
513
514 static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
515
516 /* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
517 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
518 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
519 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
520 bits are also set.
521
522 Here is how the bits are set:
523 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
524 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
525 writing in a structure element at variable address
526 invalidates all but scalar variables,
527 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
528
529 struct write_data
530 {
531 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
532 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
533 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
534 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
535 };
536
537 /* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
538
539 #define PATHLENGTH 10
540
541 /* This data describes a block that will be processed by cse_basic_block. */
542
543 struct cse_basic_block_data {
544 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
545 int low_cuid;
546 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
547 int high_cuid;
548 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
549 int nsets;
550 /* Last insn in the block. */
551 rtx last;
552 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
553 int path_size;
554 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
555 struct branch_path {
556 /* The branch insn. */
557 rtx branch;
558 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
559 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
560 by a BARRIER. */
561 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
562 } path[PATHLENGTH];
563 };
564
565 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
566 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
567 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
568
569 #define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
570 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
571 || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
572 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
573 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
574 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
575 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
576 || XEXP (X, 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
577 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
578 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
579 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
580
581 /* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
582
583 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
584 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
585 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
586
587 #define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
588 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
589 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
590 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
591 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
592 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
593 || XEXP (X, 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
594 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
595 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
596 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
597 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
598 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
599 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
600 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
601 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
602 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
603 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
604
605 static void new_basic_block PROTO((void));
606 static void make_new_qty PROTO((int));
607 static void make_regs_eqv PROTO((int, int));
608 static void delete_reg_equiv PROTO((int));
609 static int mention_regs PROTO((rtx));
610 static int insert_regs PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, int));
611 static void free_element PROTO((struct table_elt *));
612 static void remove_from_table PROTO((struct table_elt *, unsigned));
613 static struct table_elt *get_element PROTO((void));
614 static struct table_elt *lookup PROTO((rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode)),
615 *lookup_for_remove PROTO((rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode));
616 static rtx lookup_as_function PROTO((rtx, enum rtx_code));
617 static struct table_elt *insert PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
618 enum machine_mode));
619 static void merge_equiv_classes PROTO((struct table_elt *,
620 struct table_elt *));
621 static void invalidate PROTO((rtx));
622 static void remove_invalid_refs PROTO((int));
623 static void rehash_using_reg PROTO((rtx));
624 static void invalidate_memory PROTO((struct write_data *));
625 static void invalidate_for_call PROTO((void));
626 static rtx use_related_value PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *));
627 static unsigned canon_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
628 static unsigned safe_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
629 static int exp_equiv_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, int, int));
630 static void set_nonvarying_address_components PROTO((rtx, int, rtx *,
631 HOST_WIDE_INT *,
632 HOST_WIDE_INT *));
633 static int refers_to_p PROTO((rtx, rtx));
634 static int refers_to_mem_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
635 HOST_WIDE_INT));
636 static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p PROTO((rtx));
637 static rtx canon_reg PROTO((rtx, rtx));
638 static void find_best_addr PROTO((rtx, rtx *));
639 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args PROTO((enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
640 enum machine_mode *,
641 enum machine_mode *));
642 static rtx cse_gen_binary PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
643 rtx, rtx));
644 static rtx simplify_plus_minus PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
645 rtx, rtx));
646 static rtx fold_rtx PROTO((rtx, rtx));
647 static rtx equiv_constant PROTO((rtx));
648 static void record_jump_equiv PROTO((rtx, int));
649 static void record_jump_cond PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
650 rtx, rtx, int));
651 static void cse_insn PROTO((rtx, int));
652 static void note_mem_written PROTO((rtx, struct write_data *));
653 static void invalidate_from_clobbers PROTO((struct write_data *, rtx));
654 static rtx cse_process_notes PROTO((rtx, rtx));
655 static void cse_around_loop PROTO((rtx));
656 static void invalidate_skipped_set PROTO((rtx, rtx));
657 static void invalidate_skipped_block PROTO((rtx));
658 static void cse_check_loop_start PROTO((rtx, rtx));
659 static void cse_set_around_loop PROTO((rtx, rtx, rtx));
660 static rtx cse_basic_block PROTO((rtx, rtx, struct branch_path *, int));
661 static void count_reg_usage PROTO((rtx, int *, rtx, int));
662
663 extern int rtx_equal_function_value_matters;
664 \f
665 /* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
666 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
667 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
668 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
669
670 /* Return the right cost to give to an operation
671 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
672 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
673
674 #define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
675
676 int
677 rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
678 rtx x;
679 enum rtx_code outer_code;
680 {
681 register int i, j;
682 register enum rtx_code code;
683 register char *fmt;
684 register int total;
685
686 if (x == 0)
687 return 0;
688
689 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
690 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
691
692 code = GET_CODE (x);
693 switch (code)
694 {
695 case MULT:
696 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
697 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
698 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
699 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
700 total = 2;
701 else
702 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
703 break;
704 case DIV:
705 case UDIV:
706 case MOD:
707 case UMOD:
708 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
709 break;
710 case USE:
711 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
712 total = 0;
713 break;
714 case ASM_OPERANDS:
715 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
716 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
717 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
718 total = 1000;
719 break;
720 default:
721 total = 2;
722 }
723
724 switch (code)
725 {
726 case REG:
727 return ! CHEAP_REG (x);
728
729 case SUBREG:
730 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
731 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
732 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
733 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
734 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
735 return 2;
736 #ifdef RTX_COSTS
737 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
738 #endif
739 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
740 }
741
742 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
743 which is already in total. */
744
745 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
746 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
747 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
748 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
749 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
750 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
751 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
752
753 return total;
754 }
755 \f
756 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
757 for a new basic block. */
758
759 static void
760 new_basic_block ()
761 {
762 register int i;
763
764 next_qty = max_reg;
765
766 bzero ((char *) reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
767
768 bcopy ((char *) all_minus_one, (char *) reg_in_table,
769 max_reg * sizeof (int));
770 bcopy ((char *) consec_ints, (char *) reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
771 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
772
773 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
774 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
775
776 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
777 {
778 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
779 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
780 {
781 next = this->next_same_hash;
782 free_element (this);
783 }
784 }
785
786 bzero ((char *) table, sizeof table);
787
788 prev_insn = 0;
789
790 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
791 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
792 #endif
793 }
794
795 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
796 and initialize that quantity. */
797
798 static void
799 make_new_qty (reg)
800 register int reg;
801 {
802 register int q;
803
804 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
805 abort ();
806
807 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
808 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
809 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
810 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
811 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
812
813 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
814 }
815
816 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
817 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
818
819 static void
820 make_regs_eqv (new, old)
821 register int new, old;
822 {
823 register int lastr, firstr;
824 register int q = reg_qty[old];
825
826 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
827 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
828 abort ();
829
830 reg_qty[new] = q;
831 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
832 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
833
834 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
835 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
836 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
837 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
838 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
839 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
840 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
841 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
842 either. */
843 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
844 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
845 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
846 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
847 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
848 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
849 < cse_basic_block_start))
850 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
851 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
852 {
853 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
854 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
855 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
856 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
857 }
858 else
859 {
860 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
861 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
862 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
863 equivalent for anything. */
864 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
865 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
866 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
867 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
868 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
869 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
870 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
871 else
872 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
873 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
874 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
875 }
876 }
877
878 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
879
880 static void
881 delete_reg_equiv (reg)
882 register int reg;
883 {
884 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
885 register int p, n;
886
887 /* If invalid, do nothing. */
888 if (q == reg)
889 return;
890
891 p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
892 n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
893
894 if (n != -1)
895 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
896 else
897 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
898 if (p != -1)
899 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
900 else
901 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
902
903 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
904 }
905
906 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
907 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
908
909 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
910 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
911
912 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
913 is being stored in the table.
914
915 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
916 of X. */
917
918 static int
919 mention_regs (x)
920 rtx x;
921 {
922 register enum rtx_code code;
923 register int i, j;
924 register char *fmt;
925 register int changed = 0;
926
927 if (x == 0)
928 return 0;
929
930 code = GET_CODE (x);
931 if (code == REG)
932 {
933 register int regno = REGNO (x);
934 register int endregno
935 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
936 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
937 int i;
938
939 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
940 {
941 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
942 remove_invalid_refs (i);
943
944 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
945 }
946
947 return 0;
948 }
949
950 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
951 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
952 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
953 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
954
955 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
956 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
957 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
958 use of the register is in the comparison. */
959
960 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
961 {
962 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
963 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
964 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_PTR, 0))
965 {
966 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
967 changed = 1;
968 }
969
970 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
971 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
972 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_PTR, 0))
973 {
974 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
975 changed = 1;
976 }
977 }
978
979 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
980 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
981 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
982 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
983 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
984 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
985 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
986
987 return changed;
988 }
989
990 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
991 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
992 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
993 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
994 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
995 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
996
997 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
998 so X's hash code may be different. */
999
1000 static int
1001 insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
1002 rtx x;
1003 struct table_elt *classp;
1004 int modified;
1005 {
1006 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1007 {
1008 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1009
1010 /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
1011 wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here. */
1012
1013 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
1014 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] != GET_MODE (x))
1015 return 0;
1016
1017 if (modified || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno))
1018 {
1019 if (classp)
1020 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
1021 classp != 0;
1022 classp = classp->next_same_value)
1023 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
1024 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
1025 {
1026 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
1027 return 1;
1028 }
1029
1030 make_new_qty (regno);
1031 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
1032 return 1;
1033 }
1034
1035 return 0;
1036 }
1037
1038 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
1039 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
1040 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
1041 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
1042 a quantity number now. */
1043
1044 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
1045 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
1046 {
1047 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL_PTR, 0);
1048 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
1049 return 1;
1050 }
1051 else
1052 return mention_regs (x);
1053 }
1054 \f
1055 /* Look in or update the hash table. */
1056
1057 /* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
1058
1059 static void
1060 free_element (elt)
1061 struct table_elt *elt;
1062 {
1063 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
1064 free_element_chain = elt;
1065 }
1066
1067 /* Return an element that is free for use. */
1068
1069 static struct table_elt *
1070 get_element ()
1071 {
1072 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
1073 if (elt)
1074 {
1075 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
1076 return elt;
1077 }
1078 n_elements_made++;
1079 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
1080 }
1081
1082 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
1083 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
1084 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
1085 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
1086
1087 static void
1088 remove_from_table (elt, hash)
1089 register struct table_elt *elt;
1090 unsigned hash;
1091 {
1092 if (elt == 0)
1093 return;
1094
1095 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
1096 elt->first_same_value = 0;
1097
1098 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
1099
1100 {
1101 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
1102 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
1103
1104 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1105
1106 if (prev)
1107 prev->next_same_value = next;
1108 else
1109 {
1110 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1111 while (next)
1112 {
1113 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1114 next = next->next_same_value;
1115 }
1116 }
1117 }
1118
1119 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1120
1121 {
1122 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1123 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1124
1125 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1126
1127 if (prev)
1128 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1129 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1130 table[hash] = next;
1131 else
1132 {
1133 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1134 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1135 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1136 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1137 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1138 if (table[hash] == elt)
1139 table[hash] = next;
1140 }
1141 }
1142
1143 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1144
1145 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1146 {
1147 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1148 while (p->related_value != elt)
1149 p = p->related_value;
1150 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1151 if (p->related_value == p)
1152 p->related_value = 0;
1153 }
1154
1155 free_element (elt);
1156 }
1157
1158 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1159 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1160
1161 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1162 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1163
1164 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1165 looks like X. */
1166
1167 static struct table_elt *
1168 lookup (x, hash, mode)
1169 rtx x;
1170 unsigned hash;
1171 enum machine_mode mode;
1172 {
1173 register struct table_elt *p;
1174
1175 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1176 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1177 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1178 return p;
1179
1180 return 0;
1181 }
1182
1183 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1184 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1185
1186 static struct table_elt *
1187 lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1188 rtx x;
1189 unsigned hash;
1190 enum machine_mode mode;
1191 {
1192 register struct table_elt *p;
1193
1194 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1195 {
1196 int regno = REGNO (x);
1197 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1198 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1199 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1200 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1201 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1202 return p;
1203 }
1204 else
1205 {
1206 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1207 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1208 return p;
1209 }
1210
1211 return 0;
1212 }
1213
1214 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1215 If one is found, return that expression. */
1216
1217 static rtx
1218 lookup_as_function (x, code)
1219 rtx x;
1220 enum rtx_code code;
1221 {
1222 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1223 GET_MODE (x));
1224 if (p == 0)
1225 return 0;
1226
1227 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1228 {
1229 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1230 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1231 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1232 return p->exp;
1233 }
1234
1235 return 0;
1236 }
1237
1238 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1239 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1240 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1241 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1242 the order cheapest first.
1243
1244 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1245 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1246
1247 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1248 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1249 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1250 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
1251 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
1252
1253 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1254 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1255
1256 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1257 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1258 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1259
1260 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1261
1262 #define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1263
1264 static struct table_elt *
1265 insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1266 register rtx x;
1267 register struct table_elt *classp;
1268 unsigned hash;
1269 enum machine_mode mode;
1270 {
1271 register struct table_elt *elt;
1272
1273 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1274 something is wrong. */
1275 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1276 abort ();
1277
1278 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1279 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1280 {
1281 int regno = REGNO (x);
1282 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1283 int i;
1284
1285 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1286 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1287 }
1288
1289
1290 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1291
1292 elt = get_element ();
1293 elt->exp = x;
1294 elt->cost = COST (x);
1295 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1296 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1297 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1298 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1299 elt->related_value = 0;
1300 elt->in_memory = 0;
1301 elt->mode = mode;
1302 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1303 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1304 (and other const values). */
1305 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1306 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1307 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1308 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1309
1310 if (table[hash])
1311 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1312 table[hash] = elt;
1313
1314 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1315 if (classp)
1316 {
1317 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1318 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1319 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1320 {
1321 register struct table_elt *p;
1322 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1323 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1324 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1325
1326 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1327 p->first_same_value = elt;
1328 }
1329 else
1330 {
1331 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1332 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1333 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1334 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1335 p = next);
1336 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1337 elt->next_same_value = next;
1338 if (next)
1339 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1340 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1341 p->next_same_value = elt;
1342 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1343 }
1344 }
1345 else
1346 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1347
1348 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1349 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1350
1351 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1352 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1353 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1354 inserted).
1355
1356 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1357 constant, we must check the entire class.
1358
1359 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1360 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1361 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1362
1363 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1364 {
1365 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1366 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1367 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1368 }
1369
1370 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1371 {
1372 register struct table_elt *p;
1373
1374 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1375 {
1376 if (p->is_const)
1377 {
1378 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1379 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1380 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1381 break;
1382 }
1383 }
1384 }
1385
1386 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1387 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1388 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1389
1390 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1391 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1392 link it up with related expressions. */
1393 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1394 {
1395 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1396 unsigned subhash;
1397 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1398
1399 if (subexp != 0)
1400 {
1401 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1402 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1403 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1404 if (subelt == 0)
1405 subelt = insert (subexp, NULL_PTR, subhash, mode);
1406 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1407 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1408 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1409 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1410 subelt_prev = subelt;
1411 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1412 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1413 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1414 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1415 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1416 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1417 }
1418 }
1419
1420 return elt;
1421 }
1422 \f
1423 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1424 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1425 the two classes equivalent.
1426
1427 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1428 call.
1429
1430 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1431
1432 static void
1433 merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1434 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1435 {
1436 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1437
1438 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1439 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1440 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1441
1442 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1443 if (class1 == class2)
1444 return;
1445
1446 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1447 {
1448 unsigned hash;
1449 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1450 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1451
1452 next = elt->next_same_value;
1453
1454 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1455 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1456 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1457 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1458 {
1459 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1460 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1461 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1462
1463 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1464 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1465
1466 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1467
1468 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1469 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1470 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1471 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1472 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1473 }
1474 }
1475 }
1476 \f
1477 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1478 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1479 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1480 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1481 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1482 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1483
1484 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1485 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1486 a numeric offset. */
1487
1488 static void
1489 invalidate (x)
1490 rtx x;
1491 {
1492 register int i;
1493 register struct table_elt *p;
1494 rtx base;
1495 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
1496
1497 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1498 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1499 Just change the qty number of the register,
1500 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1501 and remove it itself. */
1502
1503 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1504 {
1505 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1506 register unsigned hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1507
1508 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1509 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1510 entry from the hash table.
1511
1512 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1513 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1514 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1515 overlap these registers. */
1516
1517 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1518 reg_tick[regno]++;
1519
1520 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1521 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1522 else
1523 {
1524 HOST_WIDE_INT in_table
1525 = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1526 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1527 int tregno, tendregno;
1528 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1529
1530 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1531
1532 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1533 {
1534 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1535 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1536 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1537 reg_tick[i]++;
1538 }
1539
1540 if (in_table)
1541 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1542 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1543 {
1544 next = p->next_same_hash;
1545
1546 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1547 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1548 continue;
1549
1550 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1551 tendregno
1552 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1553 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1554 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1555 }
1556 }
1557
1558 return;
1559 }
1560
1561 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1562 {
1563 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1564 abort ();
1565 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1566 return;
1567 }
1568
1569 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1570 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1571 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1572
1573 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1574 abort ();
1575
1576 set_nonvarying_address_components (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
1577 &base, &start, &end);
1578
1579 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1580 {
1581 register struct table_elt *next;
1582 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1583 {
1584 next = p->next_same_hash;
1585 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1586 remove_from_table (p, i);
1587 }
1588 }
1589 }
1590
1591 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1592 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1593 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1594 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1595
1596 static void
1597 remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1598 int regno;
1599 {
1600 register int i;
1601 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1602
1603 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1604 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1605 {
1606 next = p->next_same_hash;
1607 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1608 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, NULL_PTR))
1609 remove_from_table (p, i);
1610 }
1611 }
1612 \f
1613 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1614 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1615
1616 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1617
1618 static void
1619 rehash_using_reg (x)
1620 rtx x;
1621 {
1622 int i;
1623 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1624 unsigned hash;
1625
1626 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1627 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1628
1629 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1630 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1631
1632 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1633 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1634 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1635 return;
1636
1637 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1638 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1639 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1640
1641 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1642 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1643 {
1644 next = p->next_same_hash;
1645 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
1646 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
1647 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1648 {
1649 if (p->next_same_hash)
1650 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1651
1652 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1653 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1654 else
1655 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1656
1657 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1658 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1659 if (table[hash])
1660 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1661 table[hash] = p;
1662 }
1663 }
1664 }
1665 \f
1666 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1667 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1668
1669 static void
1670 invalidate_memory (writes)
1671 struct write_data *writes;
1672 {
1673 register int i;
1674 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1675 int all = writes->all;
1676 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1677
1678 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1679 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1680 {
1681 next = p->next_same_hash;
1682 if (p->in_memory
1683 && (all
1684 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1685 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1686 remove_from_table (p, i);
1687 }
1688 }
1689 \f
1690 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1691 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1692
1693 static void
1694 invalidate_for_call ()
1695 {
1696 int regno, endregno;
1697 int i;
1698 unsigned hash;
1699 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1700 int in_table = 0;
1701
1702 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1703 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1704 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1705 in the table. */
1706
1707 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1708 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1709 {
1710 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1711 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1712 reg_tick[regno]++;
1713
1714 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1715 }
1716
1717 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1718 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1719 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1720
1721 if (in_table)
1722 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1723 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1724 {
1725 next = p->next_same_hash;
1726
1727 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1728 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1729 continue;
1730
1731 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1732 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1733
1734 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1735 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1736 {
1737 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1738 break;
1739 }
1740 }
1741 }
1742 \f
1743 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1744 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1745 is not in the hash table),
1746 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1747 If none can be found, return 0. */
1748
1749 static rtx
1750 use_related_value (x, elt)
1751 rtx x;
1752 struct table_elt *elt;
1753 {
1754 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1755 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
1756 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
1757
1758 /* First, is there anything related known?
1759 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1760 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1761
1762 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1763 relt = elt;
1764 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1765 {
1766 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1767 if (subexp != 0)
1768 relt = lookup (subexp,
1769 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1770 GET_MODE (subexp));
1771 }
1772
1773 if (relt == 0)
1774 return 0;
1775
1776 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1777 equivalent register. */
1778
1779 p = relt;
1780 while (1)
1781 {
1782 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1783 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1784 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1785 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1786 value.
1787
1788 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1789 the same value as X. */
1790
1791 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1792 q = 0;
1793 else
1794 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1795 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1796 break;
1797
1798 if (q)
1799 break;
1800
1801 p = p->related_value;
1802
1803 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1804 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1805 and it has no related values recorded. */
1806 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1807 break;
1808 }
1809
1810 if (q == 0)
1811 return 0;
1812
1813 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1814 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1815 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1816 }
1817 \f
1818 /* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1819 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1820 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1821 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1822
1823 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1824
1825 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1826 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1827 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1828 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1829
1830 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1831 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1832
1833 static unsigned
1834 canon_hash (x, mode)
1835 rtx x;
1836 enum machine_mode mode;
1837 {
1838 register int i, j;
1839 register unsigned hash = 0;
1840 register enum rtx_code code;
1841 register char *fmt;
1842
1843 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1844 repeat:
1845 if (x == 0)
1846 return hash;
1847
1848 code = GET_CODE (x);
1849 switch (code)
1850 {
1851 case REG:
1852 {
1853 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1854
1855 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1856 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1857 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1858 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1859
1860 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1861 && (global_regs[regno]
1862 #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1863 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1864 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1865 && regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1866 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1867 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1868 #endif
1869 ))
1870 {
1871 do_not_record = 1;
1872 return 0;
1873 }
1874 hash += ((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) reg_qty[regno];
1875 return hash;
1876 }
1877
1878 case CONST_INT:
1879 {
1880 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT tem = INTVAL (x);
1881 hash += ((unsigned) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned) mode + tem;
1882 return hash;
1883 }
1884
1885 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1886 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1887 the integers representing the constant. */
1888 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
1889 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1890 {
1891 unsigned tem = XINT (x, i);
1892 hash += tem;
1893 }
1894 return hash;
1895
1896 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1897 case LABEL_REF:
1898 hash
1899 += ((unsigned) LABEL_REF << 7) + (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0);
1900 return hash;
1901
1902 case SYMBOL_REF:
1903 hash
1904 += ((unsigned) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XSTR (x, 0);
1905 return hash;
1906
1907 case MEM:
1908 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1909 {
1910 do_not_record = 1;
1911 return 0;
1912 }
1913 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1914 {
1915 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1916 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1917 }
1918 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1919 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1920 hash += (unsigned) MEM;
1921 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1922 goto repeat;
1923
1924 case PRE_DEC:
1925 case PRE_INC:
1926 case POST_DEC:
1927 case POST_INC:
1928 case PC:
1929 case CC0:
1930 case CALL:
1931 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1932 do_not_record = 1;
1933 return 0;
1934
1935 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1936 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1937 {
1938 do_not_record = 1;
1939 return 0;
1940 }
1941 }
1942
1943 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1944 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
1945 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1946 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1947 {
1948 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1949 {
1950 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1951 rtx tem1;
1952
1953 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1954 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1955 that way. */
1956 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1957 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1958 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1959 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1960 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1961 tem = tem1;
1962
1963 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1964 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1965 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1966 if (i == 0)
1967 {
1968 x = tem;
1969 goto repeat;
1970 }
1971 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1972 }
1973 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1974 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1975 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1976 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1977 {
1978 register unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *) XSTR (x, i);
1979 if (p)
1980 while (*p)
1981 hash += *p++;
1982 }
1983 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1984 {
1985 register unsigned tem = XINT (x, i);
1986 hash += tem;
1987 }
1988 else
1989 abort ();
1990 }
1991 return hash;
1992 }
1993
1994 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1995
1996 static unsigned
1997 safe_hash (x, mode)
1998 rtx x;
1999 enum machine_mode mode;
2000 {
2001 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2002 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2003 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2004 unsigned hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
2005 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2006 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2007 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2008 return hash;
2009 }
2010 \f
2011 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
2012 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
2013 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
2014 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
2015 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
2016 in Y for being marked as valid.
2017
2018 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
2019 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
2020 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
2021 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
2022 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
2023 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
2024 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
2025
2026 static int
2027 exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
2028 rtx x, y;
2029 int validate;
2030 int equal_values;
2031 {
2032 register int i, j;
2033 register enum rtx_code code;
2034 register char *fmt;
2035
2036 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
2037 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
2038 if (x == y && !validate)
2039 return 1;
2040 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2041 return x == y;
2042
2043 code = GET_CODE (x);
2044 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2045 {
2046 if (!equal_values)
2047 return 0;
2048
2049 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
2050 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
2051 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
2052 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
2053 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
2054 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
2055 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
2056 return 1;
2057
2058 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
2059 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
2060 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
2061 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
2062 return 1;
2063
2064 return 0;
2065 }
2066
2067 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
2068 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2069 return 0;
2070
2071 switch (code)
2072 {
2073 case PC:
2074 case CC0:
2075 return x == y;
2076
2077 case CONST_INT:
2078 return INTVAL (x) == INTVAL (y);
2079
2080 case LABEL_REF:
2081 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2082
2083 case SYMBOL_REF:
2084 return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
2085
2086 case REG:
2087 {
2088 int regno = REGNO (y);
2089 int endregno
2090 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2091 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2092 int i;
2093
2094 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2095 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2096 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2097
2098 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2099 return 0;
2100
2101 if (! validate)
2102 return 1;
2103
2104 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2105 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2106 return 0;
2107
2108 return 1;
2109 }
2110
2111 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2112 case PLUS:
2113 case MULT:
2114 case AND:
2115 case IOR:
2116 case XOR:
2117 case NE:
2118 case EQ:
2119 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2120 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2121 validate, equal_values))
2122 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2123 validate, equal_values)
2124 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2125 validate, equal_values)));
2126 }
2127
2128 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2129 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2130
2131 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2132 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2133 {
2134 switch (fmt[i])
2135 {
2136 case 'e':
2137 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2138 return 0;
2139 break;
2140
2141 case 'E':
2142 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2143 return 0;
2144 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2145 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2146 validate, equal_values))
2147 return 0;
2148 break;
2149
2150 case 's':
2151 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2152 return 0;
2153 break;
2154
2155 case 'i':
2156 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2157 return 0;
2158 break;
2159
2160 case 'w':
2161 if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2162 return 0;
2163 break;
2164
2165 case '0':
2166 break;
2167
2168 default:
2169 abort ();
2170 }
2171 }
2172
2173 return 1;
2174 }
2175 \f
2176 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2177 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2178 for being in the hash table. */
2179
2180 static int
2181 refers_to_p (x, y)
2182 rtx x, y;
2183 {
2184 register int i;
2185 register enum rtx_code code;
2186 register char *fmt;
2187
2188 repeat:
2189 if (x == y)
2190 return 1;
2191 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2192 return 0;
2193
2194 code = GET_CODE (x);
2195 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2196 If so, return 1. */
2197 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2198 {
2199 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2200 return 1;
2201 }
2202
2203 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2204
2205 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2206 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2207 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2208 {
2209 if (i == 0)
2210 {
2211 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2212 goto repeat;
2213 }
2214 else
2215 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2216 return 1;
2217 }
2218 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2219 {
2220 int j;
2221 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2222 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2223 return 1;
2224 }
2225
2226 return 0;
2227 }
2228 \f
2229 /* Given ADDR and SIZE (a memory address, and the size of the memory reference),
2230 set PBASE, PSTART, and PEND which correspond to the base of the address,
2231 the starting offset, and ending offset respectively.
2232
2233 ADDR is known to be a nonvarying address.
2234
2235 cse_address_varies_p returns zero for nonvarying addresses. */
2236
2237 static void
2238 set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, size, pbase, pstart, pend)
2239 rtx addr;
2240 int size;
2241 rtx *pbase;
2242 HOST_WIDE_INT *pstart, *pend;
2243 {
2244 rtx base;
2245 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
2246
2247 base = addr;
2248 start = 0;
2249 end = 0;
2250
2251 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
2252 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
2253 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
2254 && qty_const != 0
2255 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
2256 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
2257 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
2258 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
2259 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2260 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
2261 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
2262 && qty_const != 0
2263 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
2264 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
2265 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
2266 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
2267 {
2268 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2269 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
2270 }
2271
2272 /* Handle everything that we can find inside an address that has been
2273 viewed as constant. */
2274
2275 while (1)
2276 {
2277 /* If no part of this switch does a "continue", the code outside
2278 will exit this loop. */
2279
2280 switch (GET_CODE (base))
2281 {
2282 case LO_SUM:
2283 /* By definition, operand1 of a LO_SUM is the associated constant
2284 address. Use the associated constant address as the base
2285 instead. */
2286 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2287 continue;
2288
2289 case CONST:
2290 /* Strip off CONST. */
2291 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2292 continue;
2293
2294 case PLUS:
2295 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2296 {
2297 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2298 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2299 continue;
2300 }
2301 break;
2302
2303 case AND:
2304 /* Handle the case of an AND which is the negative of a power of
2305 two. This is used to represent unaligned memory operations. */
2306 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
2307 && exact_log2 (- INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1))) > 0)
2308 {
2309 set_nonvarying_address_components (XEXP (base, 0), size,
2310 pbase, pstart, pend);
2311
2312 /* Assume the worst misalignment. START is affected, but not
2313 END, so compensate but adjusting SIZE. Don't lose any
2314 constant we already had. */
2315
2316 size = *pend - *pstart - INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1)) - 1;
2317 start += *pstart - INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1)) - 1;
2318 base = *pbase;
2319 }
2320 break;
2321 }
2322
2323 break;
2324 }
2325
2326 end = start + size;
2327
2328 /* Set the return values. */
2329 *pbase = base;
2330 *pstart = start;
2331 *pend = end;
2332 }
2333
2334 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2335 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2336 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2337 and END (exclusive).
2338
2339 The value is undefined if X is a varying address (as determined by
2340 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p). This function is not used in such cases.
2341
2342 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2343 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2344 as if it were that constant value.
2345 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2346
2347 static int
2348 refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2349 rtx x, base;
2350 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
2351 {
2352 register HOST_WIDE_INT i;
2353 register enum rtx_code code;
2354 register char *fmt;
2355
2356 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2357 {
2358 start += INTVAL (base);
2359 end += INTVAL (base);
2360 base = const0_rtx;
2361 }
2362
2363 repeat:
2364 if (x == 0)
2365 return 0;
2366
2367 code = GET_CODE (x);
2368 if (code == MEM)
2369 {
2370 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2371 rtx mybase;
2372 HOST_WIDE_INT mystart, myend;
2373
2374 set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
2375 &mybase, &mystart, &myend);
2376
2377
2378 /* refers_to_mem_p is never called with varying addresses.
2379 If the base addresses are not equal, there is no chance
2380 of the memory addresses conflicting. */
2381 if (! rtx_equal_p (mybase, base))
2382 return 0;
2383
2384 return myend > start && mystart < end;
2385 }
2386
2387 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2388
2389 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2390 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2391 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2392 {
2393 if (i == 0)
2394 {
2395 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2396 goto repeat;
2397 }
2398 else
2399 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2400 return 1;
2401 }
2402 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2403 {
2404 int j;
2405 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2406 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2407 return 1;
2408 }
2409
2410 return 0;
2411 }
2412
2413 /* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2414 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2415 isn't considered variable. */
2416
2417 static int
2418 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2419 rtx x;
2420 {
2421 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2422 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2423 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2424
2425 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2426 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2427 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2428 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2429 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2430 return 0;
2431
2432 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2433 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2434 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2435 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2436 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2437 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2438 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2439 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2440 return 0;
2441
2442 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2443 }
2444 \f
2445 /* Canonicalize an expression:
2446 replace each register reference inside it
2447 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2448
2449 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2450 or vice versa, validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
2451 after we make our substitution. The calls are made with IN_GROUP non-zero
2452 so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
2453 function (unless INSN is zero). The result of apply_change_group can
2454 generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional. */
2455
2456 static rtx
2457 canon_reg (x, insn)
2458 rtx x;
2459 rtx insn;
2460 {
2461 register int i;
2462 register enum rtx_code code;
2463 register char *fmt;
2464
2465 if (x == 0)
2466 return x;
2467
2468 code = GET_CODE (x);
2469 switch (code)
2470 {
2471 case PC:
2472 case CC0:
2473 case CONST:
2474 case CONST_INT:
2475 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2476 case SYMBOL_REF:
2477 case LABEL_REF:
2478 case ADDR_VEC:
2479 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2480 return x;
2481
2482 case REG:
2483 {
2484 register int first;
2485
2486 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2487 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2488 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2489 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2490 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2491 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2492 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2493 return x;
2494
2495 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2496 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2497 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2498 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2499 }
2500 }
2501
2502 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2503 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2504 {
2505 register int j;
2506
2507 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2508 {
2509 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2510
2511 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
2512 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
2513 if (insn != 0 && new != 0
2514 && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
2515 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2516 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2517 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0))
2518 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 1);
2519 else
2520 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2521 }
2522 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2523 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2524 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2525 }
2526
2527 return x;
2528 }
2529 \f
2530 /* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2531 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2532 insn.
2533
2534 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2535 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2536 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2537 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2538 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2539 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2540 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2541 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2542 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2543 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2544 */
2545
2546 static void
2547 find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2548 rtx insn;
2549 rtx *loc;
2550 {
2551 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2552 rtx addr = *loc;
2553 int our_cost;
2554 int found_better = 1;
2555 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2556 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2557 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2558 int addr_volatile;
2559 int regno;
2560 unsigned hash;
2561
2562 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2563 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2564 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2565 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2566
2567 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2568 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2569 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2570 addresses is costly. */
2571 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2572 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2573 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2574 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2575 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2576 || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2577 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2578 && (regno = REGNO (addr), regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2579 || regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2580 || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2581 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2582 return;
2583
2584 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2585 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2586 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2587 be valid and produce better code. */
2588 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2589 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2590 addr = *loc;
2591
2592 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't look for equivalences
2593 of the whole address. Also, ignore if volatile. */
2594
2595 do_not_record = 0;
2596 hash = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2597 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2598 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2599 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2600 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2601
2602 if (addr_volatile)
2603 return;
2604
2605 elt = lookup (addr, hash, Pmode);
2606
2607 #ifndef ADDRESS_COST
2608 if (elt)
2609 {
2610 our_cost = elt->cost;
2611
2612 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2613 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2614 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2615 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG
2616 || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2617 && validate_change (insn, loc,
2618 canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), NULL_RTX), 0))
2619 return;
2620 }
2621 #else
2622
2623 if (elt)
2624 {
2625 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2626 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2627 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2628 one that hasn't already been tried. */
2629
2630 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2631 p->flag = 0;
2632
2633 while (found_better)
2634 {
2635 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2636 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2637 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2638
2639 found_better = 0;
2640 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2641 if (! p->flag
2642 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2643 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2644 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2645 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2646 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2647 {
2648 found_better = 1;
2649 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2650 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2651 best_elt = p;
2652 }
2653
2654 if (found_better)
2655 {
2656 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2657 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp),
2658 NULL_RTX), 0))
2659 return;
2660 else
2661 best_elt->flag = 1;
2662 }
2663 }
2664 }
2665
2666 /* If the address is a binary operation with the first operand a register
2667 and the second a constant, do the same as above, but looking for
2668 equivalences of the register. Then try to simplify before checking for
2669 the best address to use. This catches a few cases: First is when we
2670 have REG+const and the register is another REG+const. We can often merge
2671 the constants and eliminate one insn and one register. It may also be
2672 that a machine has a cheap REG+REG+const. Finally, this improves the
2673 code on the Alpha for unaligned byte stores. */
2674
2675 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
2676 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == '2'
2677 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == 'c')
2678 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 0)) == REG
2679 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2680 {
2681 rtx c = XEXP (*loc, 1);
2682
2683 do_not_record = 0;
2684 hash = HASH (XEXP (*loc, 0), Pmode);
2685 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2686 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2687 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2688
2689 elt = lookup (XEXP (*loc, 0), hash, Pmode);
2690 if (elt == 0)
2691 return;
2692
2693 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2694 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2695 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2696 one that hasn't already been tried. */
2697
2698 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2699 p->flag = 0;
2700
2701 while (found_better)
2702 {
2703 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2704 int best_rtx_cost = (COST (*loc) + 1) >> 1;
2705 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2706 rtx best_rtx = *loc;
2707 int count;
2708
2709 /* This is at worst case an O(n^2) algorithm, so limit our search
2710 to the first 32 elements on the list. This avoids trouble
2711 compiling code with very long basic blocks that can easily
2712 call cse_gen_binary so many times that we run out of memory. */
2713
2714 found_better = 0;
2715 for (p = elt->first_same_value, count = 0;
2716 p && count < 32;
2717 p = p->next_same_value, count++)
2718 if (! p->flag
2719 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2720 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)))
2721 {
2722 rtx new = cse_gen_binary (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode, p->exp, c);
2723
2724 if ((ADDRESS_COST (new) < best_addr_cost
2725 || (ADDRESS_COST (new) == best_addr_cost
2726 && (COST (new) + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2727 {
2728 found_better = 1;
2729 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (new);
2730 best_rtx_cost = (COST (new) + 1) >> 1;
2731 best_elt = p;
2732 best_rtx = new;
2733 }
2734 }
2735
2736 if (found_better)
2737 {
2738 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2739 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_rtx),
2740 NULL_RTX), 0))
2741 return;
2742 else
2743 best_elt->flag = 1;
2744 }
2745 }
2746 }
2747 #endif
2748 }
2749 \f
2750 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2751 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2752 what values are being compared.
2753
2754 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2755 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2756 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2757 compared to produce cc0.
2758
2759 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2760 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2761
2762 static enum rtx_code
2763 find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2, pmode1, pmode2)
2764 enum rtx_code code;
2765 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2766 enum machine_mode *pmode1, *pmode2;
2767 {
2768 rtx arg1, arg2;
2769
2770 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2771
2772 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2773
2774 while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
2775 {
2776 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2777 rtx x = 0;
2778 int reverse_code = 0;
2779 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2780
2781 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2782 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2783 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2784 when given CC0. */
2785
2786 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2787 x = arg1;
2788
2789 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2790 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2791
2792 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2793 {
2794 if (code == NE
2795 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2796 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2797 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2798 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2799 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2800 #endif
2801 )
2802 x = arg1;
2803 else if (code == EQ
2804 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2805 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2806 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2807 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2808 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2809 #endif
2810 )
2811 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2812 }
2813
2814 /* ??? We could also check for
2815
2816 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2817
2818 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2819
2820 if (x == 0)
2821 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2822 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2823 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2824 GET_MODE (arg1));
2825 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2826
2827 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2828 {
2829 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2830
2831 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2832 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2833 continue;
2834
2835 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2836 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2837 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2838 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2839 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2840 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2841 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2842 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2843 || ((code == NE
2844 || (code == LT
2845 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
2846 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2847 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2848 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2849 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2850 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2851 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2852 || (code == LT
2853 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2854 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2855 #endif
2856 )
2857 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2858 {
2859 x = p->exp;
2860 break;
2861 }
2862 else if ((code == EQ
2863 || (code == GE
2864 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
2865 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2866 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2867 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2868 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2869 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2870 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2871 || (code == GE
2872 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2873 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2874 #endif
2875 )
2876 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2877 {
2878 reverse_code = 1;
2879 x = p->exp;
2880 break;
2881 }
2882
2883 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2884 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2885 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2886 {
2887 arg1 = p->exp;
2888 continue;
2889 }
2890 }
2891
2892 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2893 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2894 if (x == 0)
2895 break;
2896
2897 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2898 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2899 code = GET_CODE (x);
2900
2901 if (reverse_code)
2902 code = reverse_condition (code);
2903 }
2904
2905 /* Return our results. Return the modes from before fold_rtx
2906 because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late. */
2907 *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
2908 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2909
2910 return code;
2911 }
2912 \f
2913 /* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2914 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2915 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2916
2917 rtx
2918 simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2919 enum rtx_code code;
2920 enum machine_mode mode;
2921 rtx op;
2922 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2923 {
2924 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2925
2926 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2927 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2928 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2929
2930 #if !defined(REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined(REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2931
2932 if (code == FLOAT && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2933 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2934 {
2935 HOST_WIDE_INT hv, lv;
2936 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2937
2938 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2939 lv = INTVAL (op), hv = INTVAL (op) < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2940 else
2941 lv = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), hv = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2942
2943 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2944 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, lv, hv);
2945 #else
2946 if (hv < 0)
2947 {
2948 d = (double) (~ hv);
2949 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2950 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2951 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (~ lv);
2952 d = (- d - 1.0);
2953 }
2954 else
2955 {
2956 d = (double) hv;
2957 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2958 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2959 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) lv;
2960 }
2961 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2962
2963 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2964 }
2965 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2966 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2967 {
2968 HOST_WIDE_INT hv, lv;
2969 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2970
2971 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2972 lv = INTVAL (op), hv = INTVAL (op) < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2973 else
2974 lv = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), hv = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2975
2976 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT * 2)
2977 ;
2978 else
2979 hv = 0, lv &= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
2980
2981 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2982 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, lv, hv);
2983 #else
2984
2985 d = (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) hv;
2986 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2987 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2988 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) lv;
2989 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2990
2991 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2992 }
2993 #endif
2994
2995 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2996 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
2997 {
2998 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2999 register HOST_WIDE_INT val;
3000
3001 switch (code)
3002 {
3003 case NOT:
3004 val = ~ arg0;
3005 break;
3006
3007 case NEG:
3008 val = - arg0;
3009 break;
3010
3011 case ABS:
3012 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
3013 break;
3014
3015 case FFS:
3016 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
3017 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
3018 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
3019 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
3020 break;
3021
3022 case TRUNCATE:
3023 val = arg0;
3024 break;
3025
3026 case ZERO_EXTEND:
3027 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
3028 op_mode = mode;
3029 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3030 {
3031 /* If we were really extending the mode,
3032 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
3033 and sign-extension. */
3034 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
3035 abort ();
3036 val = arg0;
3037 }
3038 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3039 val = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
3040 else
3041 return 0;
3042 break;
3043
3044 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3045 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
3046 op_mode = mode;
3047 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3048 {
3049 /* If we were really extending the mode,
3050 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
3051 and sign-extension. */
3052 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
3053 abort ();
3054 val = arg0;
3055 }
3056 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3057 {
3058 val
3059 = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
3060 if (val
3061 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
3062 val -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
3063 }
3064 else
3065 return 0;
3066 break;
3067
3068 case SQRT:
3069 return 0;
3070
3071 default:
3072 abort ();
3073 }
3074
3075 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3076 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3077 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3078 unsigned value for this mode. */
3079 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3080 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3081 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3082 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3083
3084 return GEN_INT (val);
3085 }
3086
3087 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
3088 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
3089 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT * 2
3090 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
3091 {
3092 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, h1, lv, hv;
3093
3094 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3095 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
3096 else
3097 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3098
3099 switch (code)
3100 {
3101 case NOT:
3102 lv = ~ l1;
3103 hv = ~ h1;
3104 break;
3105
3106 case NEG:
3107 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3108 break;
3109
3110 case ABS:
3111 if (h1 < 0)
3112 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3113 else
3114 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3115 break;
3116
3117 case FFS:
3118 hv = 0;
3119 if (l1 == 0)
3120 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
3121 else
3122 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
3123 break;
3124
3125 case TRUNCATE:
3126 /* This is just a change-of-mode, so do nothing. */
3127 break;
3128
3129 case ZERO_EXTEND:
3130 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
3131 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3132 return 0;
3133
3134 hv = 0;
3135 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3136 break;
3137
3138 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3139 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
3140 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3141 return 0;
3142 else
3143 {
3144 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3145 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3146 && (lv & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
3147 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1))) != 0)
3148 lv -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
3149
3150 hv = (lv < 0) ? ~ (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0 : 0;
3151 }
3152 break;
3153
3154 case SQRT:
3155 return 0;
3156
3157 default:
3158 return 0;
3159 }
3160
3161 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3162 }
3163
3164 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3165 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3166 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
3167 {
3168 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3169 jmp_buf handler;
3170 rtx x;
3171
3172 if (setjmp (handler))
3173 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
3174 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
3175 to do it should not get a warning. */
3176 return 0;
3177
3178 set_float_handler (handler);
3179
3180 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3181
3182 switch (code)
3183 {
3184 case NEG:
3185 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3186 break;
3187
3188 case ABS:
3189 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
3190 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3191 break;
3192
3193 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
3194 d = real_value_truncate (mode, d);
3195 break;
3196
3197 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
3198 /* All this does is change the mode. */
3199 break;
3200
3201 case FIX:
3202 d = REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (d);
3203 break;
3204
3205 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3206 d = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (d);
3207 break;
3208
3209 case SQRT:
3210 return 0;
3211
3212 default:
3213 abort ();
3214 }
3215
3216 x = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
3217 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3218 return x;
3219 }
3220
3221 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3222 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op)) == MODE_FLOAT
3223 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3224 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
3225 {
3226 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3227 jmp_buf handler;
3228 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
3229
3230 if (setjmp (handler))
3231 return 0;
3232
3233 set_float_handler (handler);
3234
3235 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3236
3237 switch (code)
3238 {
3239 case FIX:
3240 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
3241 break;
3242
3243 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3244 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
3245 break;
3246
3247 default:
3248 abort ();
3249 }
3250
3251 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3252
3253 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3254 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3255 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3256 unsigned value for this mode. */
3257 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3258 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3259 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3260 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3261
3262 return GEN_INT (val);
3263 }
3264 #endif
3265 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
3266 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
3267 else
3268 {
3269 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
3270 aren't constant. */
3271 switch (code)
3272 {
3273 case NEG:
3274 case NOT:
3275 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3276 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3277 return XEXP (op, 0);
3278 break;
3279
3280 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3281 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3282 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3283 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3284 the Vax). */
3285 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3286 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3287 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3288 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3289 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3290 return XEXP (op, 0);
3291 break;
3292 }
3293
3294 return 0;
3295 }
3296 }
3297 \f
3298 /* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3299 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3300
3301 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3302 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3303
3304 rtx
3305 simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3306 enum rtx_code code;
3307 enum machine_mode mode;
3308 rtx op0, op1;
3309 {
3310 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3311 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
3312 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3313 rtx tem;
3314
3315 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3316 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3317 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3318 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3319
3320 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3321 abort ();
3322
3323 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3324 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3325 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3326 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3327 {
3328 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3329 jmp_buf handler;
3330
3331 if (setjmp (handler))
3332 return 0;
3333
3334 set_float_handler (handler);
3335
3336 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3337 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
3338 f0 = real_value_truncate (mode, f0);
3339 f1 = real_value_truncate (mode, f1);
3340
3341 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3342 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, rtx_to_tree_code (code), f0, f1);
3343 #else
3344 switch (code)
3345 {
3346 case PLUS:
3347 value = f0 + f1;
3348 break;
3349 case MINUS:
3350 value = f0 - f1;
3351 break;
3352 case MULT:
3353 value = f0 * f1;
3354 break;
3355 case DIV:
3356 #ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3357 if (f1 == 0)
3358 return 0;
3359 #endif
3360 value = f0 / f1;
3361 break;
3362 case SMIN:
3363 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3364 break;
3365 case SMAX:
3366 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3367 break;
3368 default:
3369 abort ();
3370 }
3371 #endif
3372
3373 value = real_value_truncate (mode, value);
3374 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3375 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (value, mode);
3376 }
3377 #endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3378
3379 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3380 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3381 && width == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT * 2
3382 && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3383 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3384 {
3385 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
3386
3387 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3388 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3389 else
3390 l1 = INTVAL (op0), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3391
3392 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3393 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3394 else
3395 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3396
3397 switch (code)
3398 {
3399 case MINUS:
3400 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3401 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3402 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3403
3404 /* .. fall through ... */
3405
3406 case PLUS:
3407 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3408 break;
3409
3410 case MULT:
3411 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3412 break;
3413
3414 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3415 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3416 it. */
3417 return 0;
3418
3419 case AND:
3420 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3421 break;
3422
3423 case IOR:
3424 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3425 break;
3426
3427 case XOR:
3428 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3429 break;
3430
3431 case SMIN:
3432 if (h1 < h2
3433 || (h1 == h2
3434 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3435 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3436 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3437 else
3438 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3439 break;
3440
3441 case SMAX:
3442 if (h1 > h2
3443 || (h1 == h2
3444 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3445 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3446 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3447 else
3448 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3449 break;
3450
3451 case UMIN:
3452 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3453 || (h1 == h2
3454 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3455 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3456 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3457 else
3458 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3459 break;
3460
3461 case UMAX:
3462 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3463 || (h1 == h2
3464 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3465 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3466 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3467 else
3468 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3469 break;
3470
3471 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3472 case ASHIFT:
3473 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3474 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3475 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3476 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3477 #endif
3478
3479 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3480 return 0;
3481
3482 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3483 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3484 code == ASHIFTRT);
3485 else if (code == ASHIFT)
3486 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv, 1);
3487 else if (code == ROTATE)
3488 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3489 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3490 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3491 break;
3492
3493 default:
3494 return 0;
3495 }
3496
3497 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3498 }
3499
3500 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3501 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT || width == 0)
3502 {
3503 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3504 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3505
3506 switch (code)
3507 {
3508 case PLUS:
3509 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3510 for the other optimizations below. */
3511 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3512 && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && ! flag_fast_math)
3513 break;
3514
3515 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3516 return op0;
3517
3518 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3519 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3520 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3521 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3522 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3523
3524 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. We can only add
3525 CONST_INTs to constants since the sum of relocatable symbols
3526 can't be handled by most assemblers. Don't add CONST_INT
3527 to CONST_INT since overflow won't be computed properly if wider
3528 than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
3529
3530 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode
3531 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3532 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3533 else if (CONSTANT_P (op1) && GET_MODE (op1) != VOIDmode
3534 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3535 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
3536
3537 /* See if this is something like X * C - X or vice versa or
3538 if the multiplication is written as a shift. If so, we can
3539 distribute and make a new multiply, shift, or maybe just
3540 have X (if C is 2 in the example above). But don't make
3541 real multiply if we didn't have one before. */
3542
3543 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3544 {
3545 HOST_WIDE_INT coeff0 = 1, coeff1 = 1;
3546 rtx lhs = op0, rhs = op1;
3547 int had_mult = 0;
3548
3549 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == NEG)
3550 coeff0 = -1, lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3551 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
3552 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3553 {
3554 coeff0 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3555 had_mult = 1;
3556 }
3557 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
3558 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3559 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
3560 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3561 {
3562 coeff0 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1));
3563 lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3564 }
3565
3566 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == NEG)
3567 coeff1 = -1, rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3568 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
3569 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3570 {
3571 coeff1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3572 had_mult = 1;
3573 }
3574 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == ASHIFT
3575 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3576 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) >= 0
3577 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3578 {
3579 coeff1 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1));
3580 rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3581 }
3582
3583 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs, rhs))
3584 {
3585 tem = cse_gen_binary (MULT, mode, lhs,
3586 GEN_INT (coeff0 + coeff1));
3587 return (GET_CODE (tem) == MULT && ! had_mult) ? 0 : tem;
3588 }
3589 }
3590
3591 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3592 simplify this by the associative law.
3593 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3594 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3595 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3596
3597 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
3598 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3599 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3600 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3601 return tem;
3602 break;
3603
3604 case COMPARE:
3605 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
3606 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3607 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3608 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3609
3610 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3611
3612 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3613 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
3614 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3615 return op0;
3616 #else
3617 /* Do nothing here. */
3618 #endif
3619 break;
3620
3621 case MINUS:
3622 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3623 floating point. */
3624 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3625 && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && ! flag_fast_math)
3626 break;
3627
3628 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point,
3629 but since it is zero except in very strange circumstances, we
3630 will treat it as zero with -ffast-math. */
3631 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3632 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3633 && (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math))
3634 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
3635
3636 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3637 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3638 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3639
3640 /* (-1 - a) is ~a. */
3641 if (op0 == constm1_rtx)
3642 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op1);
3643
3644 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3645 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3646 return op0;
3647
3648 /* See if this is something like X * C - X or vice versa or
3649 if the multiplication is written as a shift. If so, we can
3650 distribute and make a new multiply, shift, or maybe just
3651 have X (if C is 2 in the example above). But don't make
3652 real multiply if we didn't have one before. */
3653
3654 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3655 {
3656 HOST_WIDE_INT coeff0 = 1, coeff1 = 1;
3657 rtx lhs = op0, rhs = op1;
3658 int had_mult = 0;
3659
3660 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == NEG)
3661 coeff0 = -1, lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3662 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
3663 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3664 {
3665 coeff0 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3666 had_mult = 1;
3667 }
3668 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
3669 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3670 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
3671 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3672 {
3673 coeff0 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1));
3674 lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3675 }
3676
3677 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == NEG)
3678 coeff1 = - 1, rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3679 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
3680 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3681 {
3682 coeff1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3683 had_mult = 1;
3684 }
3685 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == ASHIFT
3686 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3687 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) >= 0
3688 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3689 {
3690 coeff1 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1));
3691 rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3692 }
3693
3694 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs, rhs))
3695 {
3696 tem = cse_gen_binary (MULT, mode, lhs,
3697 GEN_INT (coeff0 - coeff1));
3698 return (GET_CODE (tem) == MULT && ! had_mult) ? 0 : tem;
3699 }
3700 }
3701
3702 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3703 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3704 return cse_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3705
3706 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3707 simplify this by the associative law.
3708 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3709 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3710 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3711
3712 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
3713 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3714 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3715 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3716 return tem;
3717
3718 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3719 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
3720 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3721 break;
3722
3723 case MULT:
3724 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3725 {
3726 tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3727
3728 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3729 }
3730
3731 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3732 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3733 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
3734 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3735 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3736 return op1;
3737
3738 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3739 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3740 so we can do this anyway. */
3741 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3742 return op0;
3743
3744 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift unless
3745 we are still generating RTL. This test is a kludge. */
3746 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3747 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0
3748 && ! rtx_equal_function_value_matters)
3749 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (val));
3750
3751 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3752 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3753 {
3754 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3755 jmp_buf handler;
3756 int op1is2, op1ism1;
3757
3758 if (setjmp (handler))
3759 return 0;
3760
3761 set_float_handler (handler);
3762 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3763 op1is2 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2);
3764 op1ism1 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1);
3765 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3766
3767 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3768 if (op1is2 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3769 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3770
3771 else if (op1ism1 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3772 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3773 }
3774 break;
3775
3776 case IOR:
3777 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3778 return op0;
3779 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3780 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3781 return op1;
3782 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3783 return op0;
3784 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3785 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3786 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3787 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3788 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3789 return constm1_rtx;
3790 break;
3791
3792 case XOR:
3793 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3794 return op0;
3795 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3796 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3797 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3798 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3799 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3800 return const0_rtx;
3801 break;
3802
3803 case AND:
3804 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3805 return const0_rtx;
3806 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3807 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3808 return op0;
3809 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3810 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3811 return op0;
3812 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3813 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3814 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3815 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3816 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3817 return const0_rtx;
3818 break;
3819
3820 case UDIV:
3821 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3822 below). */
3823 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3824 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
3825 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (arg1));
3826
3827 /* ... fall through ... */
3828
3829 case DIV:
3830 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3831 return op0;
3832
3833 /* In IEEE floating point, 0/x is not always 0. */
3834 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3835 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
3836 && op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3837 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3838 return op0;
3839
3840 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3841 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. Only do
3842 this with -ffast-math until an expert says it is safe in
3843 general. */
3844 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3845 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3846 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode)
3847 && flag_fast_math)
3848 {
3849 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3850 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3851
3852 if (! REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3853 {
3854 #if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3855 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, rtx_to_tree_code (DIV), dconst1, d);
3856 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3857 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3858 #else
3859 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3860 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3861 #endif
3862 }
3863 }
3864 #endif
3865 break;
3866
3867 case UMOD:
3868 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3869 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3870 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
3871 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) - 1));
3872
3873 /* ... fall through ... */
3874
3875 case MOD:
3876 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3877 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3878 return const0_rtx;
3879 break;
3880
3881 case ROTATERT:
3882 case ROTATE:
3883 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
3884 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3885 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3886 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3887 return op0;
3888
3889 /* ... fall through ... */
3890
3891 case ASHIFT:
3892 case ASHIFTRT:
3893 case LSHIFTRT:
3894 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3895 return op0;
3896 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3897 return op0;
3898 break;
3899
3900 case SMIN:
3901 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3902 && INTVAL (op1) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width -1)
3903 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3904 return op1;
3905 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3906 return op0;
3907 break;
3908
3909 case SMAX:
3910 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3911 && (INTVAL (op1)
3912 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)
3913 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3914 return op1;
3915 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3916 return op0;
3917 break;
3918
3919 case UMIN:
3920 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3921 return op1;
3922 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3923 return op0;
3924 break;
3925
3926 case UMAX:
3927 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3928 return op1;
3929 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3930 return op0;
3931 break;
3932
3933 default:
3934 abort ();
3935 }
3936
3937 return 0;
3938 }
3939
3940 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3941 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3942
3943 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3944 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3945
3946 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3947 {
3948 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3949 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3950
3951 arg0s = arg0;
3952 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3953 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
3954
3955 arg1s = arg1;
3956 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3957 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
3958 }
3959 else
3960 {
3961 arg0s = arg0;
3962 arg1s = arg1;
3963 }
3964
3965 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3966
3967 switch (code)
3968 {
3969 case PLUS:
3970 val = arg0s + arg1s;
3971 break;
3972
3973 case MINUS:
3974 val = arg0s - arg1s;
3975 break;
3976
3977 case MULT:
3978 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3979 break;
3980
3981 case DIV:
3982 if (arg1s == 0)
3983 return 0;
3984 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3985 break;
3986
3987 case MOD:
3988 if (arg1s == 0)
3989 return 0;
3990 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3991 break;
3992
3993 case UDIV:
3994 if (arg1 == 0)
3995 return 0;
3996 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 / arg1;
3997 break;
3998
3999 case UMOD:
4000 if (arg1 == 0)
4001 return 0;
4002 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 % arg1;
4003 break;
4004
4005 case AND:
4006 val = arg0 & arg1;
4007 break;
4008
4009 case IOR:
4010 val = arg0 | arg1;
4011 break;
4012
4013 case XOR:
4014 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
4015 break;
4016
4017 case LSHIFTRT:
4018 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
4019 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
4020 if (arg1 < 0)
4021 return 0;
4022
4023 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
4024 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4025 arg1 %= width;
4026 #endif
4027
4028 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1;
4029 break;
4030
4031 case ASHIFT:
4032 if (arg1 < 0)
4033 return 0;
4034
4035 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
4036 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4037 arg1 %= width;
4038 #endif
4039
4040 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1;
4041 break;
4042
4043 case ASHIFTRT:
4044 if (arg1 < 0)
4045 return 0;
4046
4047 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
4048 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4049 arg1 %= width;
4050 #endif
4051
4052 val = arg0s >> arg1;
4053
4054 /* Bootstrap compiler may not have sign extended the right shift.
4055 Manually extend the sign to insure bootstrap cc matches gcc. */
4056 if (arg0s < 0 && arg1 > 0)
4057 val |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) -1) << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - arg1);
4058
4059 break;
4060
4061 case ROTATERT:
4062 if (arg1 < 0)
4063 return 0;
4064
4065 arg1 %= width;
4066 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << (width - arg1))
4067 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1));
4068 break;
4069
4070 case ROTATE:
4071 if (arg1 < 0)
4072 return 0;
4073
4074 arg1 %= width;
4075 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1)
4076 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
4077 break;
4078
4079 case COMPARE:
4080 /* Do nothing here. */
4081 return 0;
4082
4083 case SMIN:
4084 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
4085 break;
4086
4087 case UMIN:
4088 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
4089 <= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
4090 break;
4091
4092 case SMAX:
4093 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
4094 break;
4095
4096 case UMAX:
4097 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
4098 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
4099 break;
4100
4101 default:
4102 abort ();
4103 }
4104
4105 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4106 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4107 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
4108 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4109 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4110 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4111 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4112
4113 return GEN_INT (val);
4114 }
4115 \f
4116 /* Simplify a PLUS or MINUS, at least one of whose operands may be another
4117 PLUS or MINUS.
4118
4119 Rather than test for specific case, we do this by a brute-force method
4120 and do all possible simplifications until no more changes occur. Then
4121 we rebuild the operation. */
4122
4123 static rtx
4124 simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)
4125 enum rtx_code code;
4126 enum machine_mode mode;
4127 rtx op0, op1;
4128 {
4129 rtx ops[8];
4130 int negs[8];
4131 rtx result, tem;
4132 int n_ops = 2, input_ops = 2, input_consts = 0, n_consts = 0;
4133 int first = 1, negate = 0, changed;
4134 int i, j;
4135
4136 bzero ((char *) ops, sizeof ops);
4137
4138 /* Set up the two operands and then expand them until nothing has been
4139 changed. If we run out of room in our array, give up; this should
4140 almost never happen. */
4141
4142 ops[0] = op0, ops[1] = op1, negs[0] = 0, negs[1] = (code == MINUS);
4143
4144 changed = 1;
4145 while (changed)
4146 {
4147 changed = 0;
4148
4149 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
4150 switch (GET_CODE (ops[i]))
4151 {
4152 case PLUS:
4153 case MINUS:
4154 if (n_ops == 7)
4155 return 0;
4156
4157 ops[n_ops] = XEXP (ops[i], 1);
4158 negs[n_ops++] = GET_CODE (ops[i]) == MINUS ? !negs[i] : negs[i];
4159 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4160 input_ops++;
4161 changed = 1;
4162 break;
4163
4164 case NEG:
4165 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4166 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4167 changed = 1;
4168 break;
4169
4170 case CONST:
4171 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4172 input_consts++;
4173 changed = 1;
4174 break;
4175
4176 case NOT:
4177 /* ~a -> (-a - 1) */
4178 if (n_ops != 7)
4179 {
4180 ops[n_ops] = constm1_rtx;
4181 negs[n_ops++] = negs[i];
4182 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4183 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4184 changed = 1;
4185 }
4186 break;
4187
4188 case CONST_INT:
4189 if (negs[i])
4190 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0, changed = 1;
4191 break;
4192 }
4193 }
4194
4195 /* If we only have two operands, we can't do anything. */
4196 if (n_ops <= 2)
4197 return 0;
4198
4199 /* Now simplify each pair of operands until nothing changes. The first
4200 time through just simplify constants against each other. */
4201
4202 changed = 1;
4203 while (changed)
4204 {
4205 changed = first;
4206
4207 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4208 for (j = i + 1; j < n_ops; j++)
4209 if (ops[i] != 0 && ops[j] != 0
4210 && (! first || (CONSTANT_P (ops[i]) && CONSTANT_P (ops[j]))))
4211 {
4212 rtx lhs = ops[i], rhs = ops[j];
4213 enum rtx_code ncode = PLUS;
4214
4215 if (negs[i] && ! negs[j])
4216 lhs = ops[j], rhs = ops[i], ncode = MINUS;
4217 else if (! negs[i] && negs[j])
4218 ncode = MINUS;
4219
4220 tem = simplify_binary_operation (ncode, mode, lhs, rhs);
4221 if (tem)
4222 {
4223 ops[i] = tem, ops[j] = 0;
4224 negs[i] = negs[i] && negs[j];
4225 if (GET_CODE (tem) == NEG)
4226 ops[i] = XEXP (tem, 0), negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4227
4228 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT && negs[i])
4229 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0;
4230 changed = 1;
4231 }
4232 }
4233
4234 first = 0;
4235 }
4236
4237 /* Pack all the operands to the lower-numbered entries and give up if
4238 we didn't reduce the number of operands we had. Make sure we
4239 count a CONST as two operands. If we have the same number of
4240 operands, but have made more CONSTs than we had, this is also
4241 an improvement, so accept it. */
4242
4243 for (i = 0, j = 0; j < n_ops; j++)
4244 if (ops[j] != 0)
4245 {
4246 ops[i] = ops[j], negs[i++] = negs[j];
4247 if (GET_CODE (ops[j]) == CONST)
4248 n_consts++;
4249 }
4250
4251 if (i + n_consts > input_ops
4252 || (i + n_consts == input_ops && n_consts <= input_consts))
4253 return 0;
4254
4255 n_ops = i;
4256
4257 /* If we have a CONST_INT, put it last. */
4258 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4259 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT)
4260 {
4261 tem = ops[n_ops - 1], ops[n_ops - 1] = ops[i] , ops[i] = tem;
4262 j = negs[n_ops - 1], negs[n_ops - 1] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4263 }
4264
4265 /* Put a non-negated operand first. If there aren't any, make all
4266 operands positive and negate the whole thing later. */
4267 for (i = 0; i < n_ops && negs[i]; i++)
4268 ;
4269
4270 if (i == n_ops)
4271 {
4272 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
4273 negs[i] = 0;
4274 negate = 1;
4275 }
4276 else if (i != 0)
4277 {
4278 tem = ops[0], ops[0] = ops[i], ops[i] = tem;
4279 j = negs[0], negs[0] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4280 }
4281
4282 /* Now make the result by performing the requested operations. */
4283 result = ops[0];
4284 for (i = 1; i < n_ops; i++)
4285 result = cse_gen_binary (negs[i] ? MINUS : PLUS, mode, result, ops[i]);
4286
4287 return negate ? gen_rtx (NEG, mode, result) : result;
4288 }
4289 \f
4290 /* Make a binary operation by properly ordering the operands and
4291 seeing if the expression folds. */
4292
4293 static rtx
4294 cse_gen_binary (code, mode, op0, op1)
4295 enum rtx_code code;
4296 enum machine_mode mode;
4297 rtx op0, op1;
4298 {
4299 rtx tem;
4300
4301 /* Put complex operands first and constants second if commutative. */
4302 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c'
4303 && ((CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
4304 || (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op0)) == 'o'
4305 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')
4306 || (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
4307 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == 'o'
4308 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')))
4309 tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
4310
4311 /* If this simplifies, do it. */
4312 tem = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1);
4313
4314 if (tem)
4315 return tem;
4316
4317 /* Handle addition and subtraction of CONST_INT specially. Otherwise,
4318 just form the operation. */
4319
4320 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4321 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4322 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
4323 else if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4324 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4325 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
4326 else
4327 return gen_rtx (code, mode, op0, op1);
4328 }
4329 \f
4330 /* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
4331 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. If MODE
4332 is VOIDmode, both operands must also be VOIDmode and we compare the
4333 operands in "infinite precision".
4334
4335 If no simplification is possible, this function returns zero. Otherwise,
4336 it returns either const_true_rtx or const0_rtx. */
4337
4338 rtx
4339 simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
4340 enum rtx_code code;
4341 enum machine_mode mode;
4342 rtx op0, op1;
4343 {
4344 int equal, op0lt, op0ltu, op1lt, op1ltu;
4345 rtx tem;
4346
4347 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
4348 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
4349 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
4350
4351 /* We can't simplify MODE_CC values since we don't know what the
4352 actual comparison is. */
4353 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC
4354 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4355 || op0 == cc0_rtx
4356 #endif
4357 )
4358 return 0;
4359
4360 /* For integer comparisons of A and B maybe we can simplify A - B and can
4361 then simplify a comparison of that with zero. If A and B are both either
4362 a register or a CONST_INT, this can't help; testing for these cases will
4363 prevent infinite recursion here and speed things up.
4364
4365 If CODE is an unsigned comparison, we can only do this if A - B is a
4366 constant integer, and then we have to compare that integer with zero as a
4367 signed comparison. Note that this will give the incorrect result from
4368 comparisons that overflow. Since these are undefined, this is probably
4369 OK. If it causes a problem, we can check for A or B being an address
4370 (fp + const or SYMBOL_REF) and only do it in that case. */
4371
4372 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode) && op1 != const0_rtx
4373 && ! ((GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4374 && (GET_CODE (op1) == REG || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
4375 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0, op1))
4376 && (GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
4377 || (code != GTU && code != GEU &&
4378 code != LTU && code != LEU)))
4379 return simplify_relational_operation (signed_condition (code),
4380 mode, tem, const0_rtx);
4381
4382 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know the
4383 result. */
4384 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
4385 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4386 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)) || flag_fast_math))
4387 equal = 1, op0lt = 0, op0ltu = 0, op1lt = 0, op1ltu = 0;
4388
4389 /* If the operands are floating-point constants, see if we can fold
4390 the result. */
4391 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
4392 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
4393 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
4394 {
4395 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
4396 jmp_buf handler;
4397
4398 if (setjmp (handler))
4399 return 0;
4400
4401 set_float_handler (handler);
4402 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
4403 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
4404 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
4405 op0lt = op0ltu = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
4406 op1lt = op1ltu = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
4407 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
4408 }
4409 #endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
4410
4411 /* Otherwise, see if the operands are both integers. */
4412 else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT || mode == VOIDmode)
4413 && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4414 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
4415 {
4416 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4417 HOST_WIDE_INT l0s, h0s, l1s, h1s;
4418 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l0u, h0u, l1u, h1u;
4419
4420 /* Get the two words comprising each integer constant. */
4421 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4422 {
4423 l0u = l0s = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0);
4424 h0u = h0s = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
4425 }
4426 else
4427 {
4428 l0u = l0s = INTVAL (op0);
4429 h0u = 0, h0s = l0s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4430 }
4431
4432 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4433 {
4434 l1u = l1s = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
4435 h1u = h1s = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
4436 }
4437 else
4438 {
4439 l1u = l1s = INTVAL (op1);
4440 h1u = 0, h1s = l1s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4441 }
4442
4443 /* If WIDTH is nonzero and smaller than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT,
4444 we have to sign or zero-extend the values. */
4445 if (width != 0 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4446 h0u = h1u = 0, h0s = l0s < 0 ? -1 : 0, h1s = l1s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4447
4448 if (width != 0 && width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4449 {
4450 l0u &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4451 l1u &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4452
4453 if (l0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4454 l0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
4455
4456 if (l1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4457 l1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
4458 }
4459
4460 equal = (h0u == h1u && l0u == l1u);
4461 op0lt = (h0s < h1s || (h0s == h1s && l0s < l1s));
4462 op1lt = (h1s < h0s || (h1s == h0s && l1s < l0s));
4463 op0ltu = (h0u < h1u || (h0u == h1u && l0u < l1u));
4464 op1ltu = (h1u < h0u || (h1u == h0u && l1u < l0u));
4465 }
4466
4467 /* Otherwise, there are some code-specific tests we can make. */
4468 else
4469 {
4470 switch (code)
4471 {
4472 case EQ:
4473 /* References to the frame plus a constant or labels cannot
4474 be zero, but a SYMBOL_REF can due to #pragma weak. */
4475 if (((NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4476 || GET_CODE (op0) == LABEL_REF)
4477 #if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4478 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4479 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx
4480 #endif
4481 )
4482 return const0_rtx;
4483 break;
4484
4485 case NE:
4486 if (((NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4487 || GET_CODE (op0) == LABEL_REF)
4488 #if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4489 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx
4490 #endif
4491 )
4492 return const_true_rtx;
4493 break;
4494
4495 case GEU:
4496 /* Unsigned values are never negative. */
4497 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
4498 return const_true_rtx;
4499 break;
4500
4501 case LTU:
4502 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
4503 return const0_rtx;
4504 break;
4505
4506 case LEU:
4507 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
4508 unsigned value. */
4509 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4510 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4511 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
4512 return const_true_rtx;
4513 break;
4514
4515 case GTU:
4516 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4517 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4518 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
4519 return const0_rtx;
4520 break;
4521 }
4522
4523 return 0;
4524 }
4525
4526 /* If we reach here, EQUAL, OP0LT, OP0LTU, OP1LT, and OP1LTU are set
4527 as appropriate. */
4528 switch (code)
4529 {
4530 case EQ:
4531 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4532 case NE:
4533 return ! equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4534 case LT:
4535 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4536 case GT:
4537 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4538 case LTU:
4539 return op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4540 case GTU:
4541 return op1ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4542 case LE:
4543 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4544 case GE:
4545 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4546 case LEU:
4547 return equal || op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4548 case GEU:
4549 return equal || op1ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4550 }
4551
4552 abort ();
4553 }
4554 \f
4555 /* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4556 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4557 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4558
4559 rtx
4560 simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4561 enum rtx_code code;
4562 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4563 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4564 {
4565 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4566
4567 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4568 if (width == 0)
4569 width = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT;
4570
4571 switch (code)
4572 {
4573 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4574 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4575 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4576 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4577 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4578 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
4579 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4580 {
4581 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
4582 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (op0);
4583
4584 #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4585 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4586 #else
4587 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4588 #endif
4589 if (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != INTVAL (op1))
4590 {
4591 /* First zero-extend. */
4592 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
4593 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
4594 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT
4595 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
4596 val |= ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
4597 }
4598
4599 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4600 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4601 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4602 unsigned value for this mode. */
4603 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4604 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4605 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4606 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4607
4608 return GEN_INT (val);
4609 }
4610 break;
4611
4612 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4613 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4614 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4615 break;
4616
4617 default:
4618 abort ();
4619 }
4620
4621 return 0;
4622 }
4623 \f
4624 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4625 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4626 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4627 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4628 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4629
4630 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4631 return those contents here. equiv_constant is called to
4632 perform that task.
4633
4634 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4635 of X before modifying it. */
4636
4637 static rtx
4638 fold_rtx (x, insn)
4639 rtx x;
4640 rtx insn;
4641 {
4642 register enum rtx_code code;
4643 register enum machine_mode mode;
4644 register char *fmt;
4645 register int i;
4646 rtx new = 0;
4647 int copied = 0;
4648 int must_swap = 0;
4649
4650 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4651 rtx folded_arg0;
4652 rtx folded_arg1;
4653
4654 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4655 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4656 rtx const_arg0;
4657 rtx const_arg1;
4658 rtx const_arg2;
4659
4660 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4661 extends. */
4662 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4663
4664 if (x == 0)
4665 return x;
4666
4667 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4668 code = GET_CODE (x);
4669 switch (code)
4670 {
4671 case CONST:
4672 case CONST_INT:
4673 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4674 case SYMBOL_REF:
4675 case LABEL_REF:
4676 case REG:
4677 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4678 since they are used only for lists of args
4679 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4680 case EXPR_LIST:
4681 return x;
4682
4683 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4684 case CC0:
4685 return prev_insn_cc0;
4686 #endif
4687
4688 case PC:
4689 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4690 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4691 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4692 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4693 {
4694 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4695
4696 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4697 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4698 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4699 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4700 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4701 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4702 }
4703 break;
4704
4705 case SUBREG:
4706 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4707 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4708 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
4709 return new;
4710
4711 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we have no idea what value the
4712 extra bits would have. However, if the operand is equivalent
4713 to a SUBREG whose operand is the same as our mode, and all the
4714 modes are within a word, we can just use the inner operand
4715 because these SUBREGs just say how to treat the register.
4716
4717 Similarly if we find an integer constant. */
4718
4719 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4720 {
4721 enum machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
4722 struct table_elt *elt;
4723
4724 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4725 && GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4726 && (elt = lookup (SUBREG_REG (x), HASH (SUBREG_REG (x), imode),
4727 imode)) != 0)
4728 for (elt = elt->first_same_value;
4729 elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4730 {
4731 if (CONSTANT_P (elt->exp)
4732 && GET_MODE (elt->exp) == VOIDmode)
4733 return elt->exp;
4734
4735 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4736 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4737 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4738 return copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4739 }
4740
4741 return x;
4742 }
4743
4744 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4745 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4746 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4747
4748 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4749 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4750 if (const_arg0)
4751 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4752
4753 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4754 {
4755 new = 0;
4756
4757 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4758 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4759 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4760 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4761 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4762 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4763 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4764 if (new)
4765 return new;
4766 }
4767
4768 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
4769 we can find an equivalence for REG that is an arithmetic operation
4770 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4771 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4772 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4773 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4774 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4775 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4776 word-sized arithmetic.
4777
4778 Also look for a case where we have a SUBREG whose operand is the
4779 same as our result. If both modes are smaller than a word, we
4780 are simply interpreting a register in different modes and we
4781 can use the inner value. */
4782
4783 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4784 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4785 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4786 {
4787 struct table_elt *elt;
4788
4789 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4790 called. */
4791 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4792 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4793 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4794
4795 if (elt)
4796 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4797
4798 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4799 {
4800 enum rtx_code eltcode = GET_CODE (elt->exp);
4801
4802 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4803 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4804 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4805 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4806 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4807 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4808 {
4809 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4810
4811 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4812 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
4813
4814 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4815 if (op0)
4816 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4817 op0, mode);
4818 }
4819 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4820 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4821 && eltcode != DIV && eltcode != MOD
4822 && eltcode != UDIV && eltcode != UMOD
4823 && eltcode != ASHIFTRT && eltcode != LSHIFTRT
4824 && eltcode != ROTATE && eltcode != ROTATERT
4825 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4826 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4827 == mode))
4828 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4829 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4830 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4831 == mode))
4832 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4833 {
4834 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4835 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4836
4837 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4838 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
4839
4840 if (op0)
4841 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4842
4843 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4844 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, NULL_RTX);
4845
4846 if (op1)
4847 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4848
4849 /* If we are looking for the low SImode part of
4850 (ashift:DI c (const_int 32)), it doesn't work
4851 to compute that in SImode, because a 32-bit shift
4852 in SImode is unpredictable. We know the value is 0. */
4853 if (op0 && op1
4854 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) == ASHIFT
4855 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4856 && INTVAL (op1) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4857 {
4858 if (INTVAL (op1) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (elt->exp)))
4859
4860 /* If the count fits in the inner mode's width,
4861 but exceeds the outer mode's width,
4862 the value will get truncated to 0
4863 by the subreg. */
4864 new = const0_rtx;
4865 else
4866 /* If the count exceeds even the inner mode's width,
4867 don't fold this expression. */
4868 new = 0;
4869 }
4870 else if (op0 && op1)
4871 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4872 op0, op1);
4873 }
4874
4875 else if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4876 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4877 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4878 <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
4879 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4880 new = copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4881
4882 if (new)
4883 return new;
4884 }
4885 }
4886
4887 return x;
4888
4889 case NOT:
4890 case NEG:
4891 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4892 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4893 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4894 if (new)
4895 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4896 break;
4897
4898 case MEM:
4899 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4900 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4901 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4902 if (insn != 0)
4903 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4904
4905 {
4906 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4907 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
4908 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
4909 rtx base = 0;
4910 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
4911
4912 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4913 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4914 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4915 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4916 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4917
4918 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4919 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4920 base = addr;
4921 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4922 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4923 {
4924 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4925 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4926 }
4927 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4928 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4929 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4930
4931 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4932 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4933 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4934 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4935 {
4936 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4937 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4938 rtx new;
4939
4940 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4941 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4942
4943 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4944 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4945 return constant;
4946
4947 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4948 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4949 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4950 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4951 worry about. */
4952 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4953 return x;
4954
4955 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4956 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4957 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4958 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4959 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4960 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4961 return new;
4962
4963 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4964 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4965 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4966 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4967 return new;
4968 }
4969
4970 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4971 table, we also know its value. */
4972 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4973 {
4974 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4975 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4976
4977 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4978 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4979 {
4980 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4981
4982 if (offset >= 0
4983 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4984 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4985 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4986 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4987 }
4988 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4989 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4990 {
4991 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4992
4993 if (offset >= 0
4994 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4995 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4996 {
4997 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4998 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4999 XEXP (table, 0));
5000
5001 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
5002 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
5003
5004 /* Indicate this is a constant. This isn't a
5005 valid form of CONST, but it will only be used
5006 to fold the next insns and then discarded, so
5007 it should be safe. */
5008 return gen_rtx (CONST, GET_MODE (new), new);
5009 }
5010 }
5011 }
5012
5013 return x;
5014 }
5015 }
5016
5017 const_arg0 = 0;
5018 const_arg1 = 0;
5019 const_arg2 = 0;
5020 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
5021
5022 /* Try folding our operands.
5023 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
5024
5025 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5026 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5027 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5028 {
5029 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
5030 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
5031 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
5032 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
5033 rtx replacements[2];
5034 int j;
5035
5036 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
5037 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
5038 {
5039 case REG:
5040 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
5041 here for speed. */
5042 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
5043 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
5044 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
5045 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
5046 const_arg
5047 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
5048 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
5049 break;
5050
5051 case CONST:
5052 case CONST_INT:
5053 case SYMBOL_REF:
5054 case LABEL_REF:
5055 case CONST_DOUBLE:
5056 const_arg = arg;
5057 break;
5058
5059 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
5060 case CC0:
5061 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
5062 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
5063 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
5064 break;
5065 #endif
5066
5067 default:
5068 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
5069 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
5070 }
5071
5072 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
5073 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
5074 switch (i)
5075 {
5076 case 0:
5077 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
5078 const_arg0 = const_arg;
5079 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
5080 break;
5081 case 1:
5082 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
5083 const_arg1 = const_arg;
5084 break;
5085 case 2:
5086 const_arg2 = const_arg;
5087 break;
5088 }
5089
5090 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
5091 equivalent constant argument. */
5092 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
5093 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
5094 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
5095 else
5096 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
5097
5098 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
5099 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
5100 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
5101 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
5102 than what is already there. */
5103
5104 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
5105 continue;
5106
5107 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
5108 {
5109 x = copy_rtx (x);
5110 copied = 1;
5111 }
5112
5113 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
5114 for (j = 0;
5115 j < 2 && replacements[j]
5116 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
5117 j++)
5118 {
5119 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
5120 break;
5121
5122 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
5123 {
5124 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
5125 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
5126
5127 if (apply_change_group ())
5128 {
5129 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
5130 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
5131 rtx tem;
5132
5133 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
5134 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
5135 must_swap = 1;
5136 break;
5137 }
5138 }
5139 }
5140 }
5141
5142 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5143 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
5144 Doing nothing is harmless. */
5145 ;
5146
5147 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
5148 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
5149 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
5150
5151 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
5152 {
5153 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
5154 && (const_arg1 == 0
5155 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
5156 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
5157 {
5158 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5159
5160 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
5161 {
5162 x = copy_rtx (x);
5163 copied = 1;
5164 }
5165
5166 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
5167 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
5168 if (apply_change_group ())
5169 {
5170 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
5171 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
5172 }
5173 }
5174 }
5175
5176 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
5177
5178 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5179 {
5180 case '1':
5181 {
5182 int is_const = 0;
5183
5184 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the
5185 original mode. */
5186 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
5187 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
5188 break;
5189
5190 /* If we had a CONST, strip it off and put it back later if we
5191 fold. */
5192 if (const_arg0 != 0 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST)
5193 is_const = 1, const_arg0 = XEXP (const_arg0, 0);
5194
5195 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
5196 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5197 mode_arg0);
5198 if (new != 0 && is_const)
5199 new = gen_rtx (CONST, mode, new);
5200 }
5201 break;
5202
5203 case '<':
5204 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
5205 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
5206 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
5207 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
5208
5209 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5210 {
5211 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
5212 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
5213 enum machine_mode mode_arg1;
5214
5215 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5216 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5217 {
5218 true = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE,
5219 mode);
5220 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5221 }
5222 #endif
5223
5224 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
5225 &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
5226 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
5227 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
5228
5229 /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
5230 what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
5231 anything with this comparison. */
5232
5233 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
5234 break;
5235
5236 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
5237 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
5238 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5239 {
5240 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
5241 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
5242 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
5243 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
5244 #if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
5245 come out as 0. */
5246 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
5247 #endif
5248 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
5249 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
5250 {
5251 if (code == EQ)
5252 return false;
5253 else if (code == NE)
5254 return true;
5255 }
5256
5257 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
5258 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
5259 since x might be a NaN. */
5260
5261 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
5262 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0) || flag_fast_math)
5263 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
5264 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5265 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5266 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
5267 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
5268 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
5269 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
5270 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5271 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
5272 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
5273 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5274 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
5275 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
5276 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
5277 ? true : false);
5278
5279 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
5280 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
5281 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
5282 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
5283 {
5284 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
5285
5286 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
5287 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
5288 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5289 reverse_condition (code))
5290 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)))
5291 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
5292 || (const_arg1
5293 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
5294 const_arg1))
5295 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5296 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
5297 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
5298 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5299 code)
5300 ? true : false);
5301 }
5302 }
5303 }
5304
5305 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
5306 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
5307 determine the result of this comparison. */
5308
5309 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
5310 {
5311 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
5312 rtx inner_const;
5313
5314 if (y != 0
5315 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
5316 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
5317 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
5318 {
5319 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
5320 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT >= sign_bitnum
5321 && (INTVAL (inner_const)
5322 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_bitnum)));
5323 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
5324
5325 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5326 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5327 {
5328 true = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE,
5329 mode);
5330 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5331 }
5332 #endif
5333
5334 switch (code)
5335 {
5336 case EQ:
5337 return false;
5338 case NE:
5339 return true;
5340 case LT: case LE:
5341 if (has_sign)
5342 return true;
5343 break;
5344 case GT: case GE:
5345 if (has_sign)
5346 return false;
5347 break;
5348 }
5349 }
5350 }
5351
5352 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
5353 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5354 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5355 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5356 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5357 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
5358 : CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
5359 #endif
5360 break;
5361
5362 case '2':
5363 case 'c':
5364 switch (code)
5365 {
5366 case PLUS:
5367 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
5368 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
5369 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
5370 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
5371 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
5372 {
5373 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
5374
5375 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5376 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
5377 return XEXP (y, 0);
5378
5379 /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above. */
5380 if ((y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, CONST)) != 0
5381 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
5382 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
5383 && XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0),1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
5384 return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
5385 }
5386
5387 /* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
5388 CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
5389 positive constant. Make a MINUS if so. Don't do this for
5390 a negative constant since we might then alternate between
5391 chosing positive and negative constants. Having the positive
5392 constant previously-used is the more common case. */
5393 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT
5394 && INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG)
5395 {
5396 rtx new_const = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (const_arg1));
5397 struct table_elt *p
5398 = lookup (new_const, safe_hash (new_const, mode) % NBUCKETS,
5399 mode);
5400
5401 if (p)
5402 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5403 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG)
5404 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
5405 canon_reg (p->exp, NULL_RTX));
5406 }
5407 goto from_plus;
5408
5409 case MINUS:
5410 /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
5411 If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C). */
5412 if (const_arg1 != 0 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5413 {
5414 rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
5415 if (y && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == CONST_INT)
5416 return fold_rtx (plus_constant (copy_rtx (y),
5417 -INTVAL (const_arg1)),
5418 NULL_RTX);
5419 }
5420
5421 /* ... fall through ... */
5422
5423 from_plus:
5424 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
5425 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
5426 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
5427 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
5428 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
5429 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
5430 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
5431 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
5432 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
5433 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
5434
5435 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5436 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5437 {
5438 int is_shift
5439 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
5440 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
5441 rtx inner_const;
5442 enum rtx_code associate_code;
5443 rtx new_const;
5444
5445 if (y == 0
5446 || 0 == (inner_const
5447 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
5448 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
5449 /* If we have compiled a statement like
5450 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
5451 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
5452 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
5453 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
5454 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
5455 break;
5456
5457 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
5458 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
5459 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
5460 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
5461
5462 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
5463 && (0
5464 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
5465 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5466 #endif
5467 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
5468 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5469 #endif
5470 ))
5471 break;
5472
5473 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
5474 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
5475
5476 associate_code
5477 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
5478 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
5479
5480 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
5481 const_arg1, inner_const);
5482
5483 if (new_const == 0)
5484 break;
5485
5486 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
5487 produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
5488 This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
5489 shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
5490 of shifts. */
5491
5492 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
5493 && INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
5494 {
5495 /* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
5496 form into a shift of the number of bits - 1. */
5497 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
5498 new_const = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
5499 else
5500 break;
5501 }
5502
5503 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
5504
5505 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
5506 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
5507 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
5508
5509 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
5510 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
5511
5512 return cse_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
5513 }
5514 }
5515
5516 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5517 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5518 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5519 break;
5520
5521 case 'o':
5522 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
5523 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
5524 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
5525 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
5526 return const_arg1;
5527 break;
5528
5529 case '3':
5530 case 'b':
5531 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
5532 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5533 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
5534 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
5535 break;
5536 }
5537
5538 return new ? new : x;
5539 }
5540 \f
5541 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
5542 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
5543
5544 static rtx
5545 equiv_constant (x)
5546 rtx x;
5547 {
5548 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
5549 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
5550 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
5551 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
5552
5553 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
5554 return x;
5555
5556 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
5557 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
5558 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
5559 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
5560
5561 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5562 {
5563 struct table_elt *elt;
5564
5565 x = fold_rtx (x, NULL_RTX);
5566 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5567 return x;
5568
5569 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
5570 if (elt == 0)
5571 return 0;
5572
5573 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
5574 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
5575 return elt->exp;
5576 }
5577
5578 return 0;
5579 }
5580 \f
5581 /* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
5582 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
5583 least-significant part of X.
5584 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
5585
5586 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
5587
5588 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
5589
5590 rtx
5591 gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
5592 enum machine_mode mode;
5593 register rtx x;
5594 {
5595 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
5596
5597 if (result)
5598 return result;
5599 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5600 {
5601 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
5602 register int offset = 0;
5603 rtx new;
5604
5605 #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
5606 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
5607 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
5608 #endif
5609 #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5610 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
5611 is unchanged. */
5612 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5613 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5614 #endif
5615 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5616 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5617 return 0;
5618 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5619 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5620 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5621 return new;
5622 }
5623 else
5624 return 0;
5625 }
5626 \f
5627 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5628 branch. It will be zero if not.
5629
5630 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5631 if we are following the taken case of
5632 if (i == 2)
5633 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5634
5635 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5636 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5637
5638 static void
5639 record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5640 rtx insn;
5641 int taken;
5642 {
5643 int cond_known_true;
5644 rtx op0, op1;
5645 enum machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
5646 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5647 enum rtx_code code;
5648
5649 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5650 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5651 return;
5652
5653 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5654 if (taken)
5655 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5656 else
5657 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5658
5659 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5660 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5661 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5662 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5663 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5664 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5665
5666 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
5667 if (! cond_known_true)
5668 {
5669 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5670 code = reverse_condition (code);
5671 }
5672
5673 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5674 mode = mode0;
5675 if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
5676 mode = mode1;
5677
5678 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5679 }
5680
5681 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5682 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5683 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5684 above function and called recursively. */
5685
5686 static void
5687 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5688 enum rtx_code code;
5689 enum machine_mode mode;
5690 rtx op0, op1;
5691 int reversed_nonequality;
5692 {
5693 unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
5694 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5695 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5696
5697 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5698 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5699 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5700 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5701
5702 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE. */
5703 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5704 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5705 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
5706 {
5707 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5708 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5709
5710 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5711 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5712 reversed_nonequality);
5713 }
5714
5715 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5716 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5717 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
5718 {
5719 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5720 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5721
5722 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5723 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5724 reversed_nonequality);
5725 }
5726
5727 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5728 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5729
5730 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
5731 if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
5732 alternating between two modes each wider than MODE. */
5733
5734 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5735 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5736 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5737 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
5738 {
5739 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5740 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5741
5742 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5743 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5744 reversed_nonequality);
5745 }
5746
5747 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5748 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5749 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5750 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
5751 {
5752 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5753 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5754
5755 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5756 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5757 reversed_nonequality);
5758 }
5759
5760 /* Hash both operands. */
5761
5762 do_not_record = 0;
5763 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5764 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5765 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
5766 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5767 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5768
5769 if (do_not_record)
5770 return;
5771
5772 do_not_record = 0;
5773 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5774 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5775 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
5776 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5777 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5778
5779 if (do_not_record)
5780 return;
5781
5782 /* Look up both operands. */
5783 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
5784 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
5785
5786 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5787 comparison. Similarly if this is floating-point. In the latter
5788 case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
5789 If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
5790 whose intent was to change -0 to +0. */
5791
5792 if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
5793 {
5794 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5795 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5796 do anything. */
5797
5798 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5799 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5800
5801 if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
5802 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5803 return;
5804
5805 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5806 new quantity number. */
5807 if (op0_elt == 0)
5808 {
5809 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
5810 {
5811 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5812 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
5813
5814 /* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
5815 as well. Faster to rehash than to check, except
5816 for the simple case of a constant. */
5817 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
5818 op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
5819 }
5820
5821 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash, mode);
5822 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5823 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5824 }
5825
5826 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5827 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5828 {
5829 /* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same. */
5830 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
5831
5832 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5833 if (op1_elt == 0)
5834 {
5835 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
5836 {
5837 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5838 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
5839 }
5840
5841 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash, mode);
5842 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5843 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5844 }
5845
5846 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5847 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5848 }
5849 else
5850 {
5851 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5852 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5853 }
5854
5855 return;
5856 }
5857
5858 /* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
5859 then merge the equivalences. */
5860
5861 if (op0_elt == 0)
5862 {
5863 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
5864 {
5865 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5866 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
5867 }
5868
5869 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash, mode);
5870 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5871 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5872 }
5873
5874 if (op1_elt == 0)
5875 {
5876 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
5877 {
5878 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5879 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
5880 }
5881
5882 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash, mode);
5883 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5884 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5885 }
5886
5887 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5888 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5889 }
5890 \f
5891 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
5892 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5893 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5894 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5895 of available values.
5896
5897 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5898 the insn. */
5899
5900 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5901
5902 struct set
5903 {
5904 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5905 rtx rtl;
5906 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5907 rtx src;
5908 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5909 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5910 /* Hash value for the SET_SRC. */
5911 unsigned src_hash;
5912 /* Hash value for the SET_DEST. */
5913 unsigned dest_hash;
5914 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5915 rtx inner_dest;
5916 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5917 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5918 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5919 char src_in_memory;
5920 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5921 char src_in_struct;
5922 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5923 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5924 char src_volatile;
5925 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5926 enum machine_mode mode;
5927 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5928 rtx src_const;
5929 /* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5930 unsigned src_const_hash;
5931 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5932 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5933 };
5934
5935 static void
5936 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5937 rtx insn;
5938 int in_libcall_block;
5939 {
5940 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5941 register int i;
5942 rtx tem;
5943 register int n_sets = 0;
5944
5945 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5946 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5947 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5948 struct write_data writes_memory;
5949 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5950
5951 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5952 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5953 int src_eqv_volatile;
5954 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5955 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5956 unsigned src_eqv_hash;
5957
5958 struct set *sets;
5959
5960 this_insn = insn;
5961 writes_memory = init;
5962
5963 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5964 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5965 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5966 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5967
5968 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
5969 {
5970 for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
5971 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER)
5972 invalidate (SET_DEST (XEXP (tem, 0)));
5973 }
5974
5975 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5976 {
5977 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5978 sets[0].rtl = x;
5979
5980 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5981 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5982 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5983 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5984 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5985 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5986 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5987 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5988 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5989 ;
5990
5991 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5992 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5993 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5994 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5995 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.
5996 We need not check the return of apply_change_group; see canon_reg. */
5997
5998 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5999 {
6000 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
6001 apply_change_group ();
6002 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
6003 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
6004 }
6005 else
6006 n_sets = 1;
6007 }
6008 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6009 {
6010 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
6011
6012 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
6013
6014 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
6015 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
6016 elsewhere in this insn.
6017 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
6018 we should presume that that is for a reason,
6019 and we should not substitute some other register
6020 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
6021 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
6022 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
6023 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
6024 anything in that case. */
6025 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
6026 {
6027 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6028 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6029 {
6030 rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
6031
6032 if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == REG
6033 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
6034 invalidate (clobbered);
6035 else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6036 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6037 invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0));
6038 }
6039 }
6040
6041 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
6042 {
6043 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6044 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
6045 {
6046 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
6047 ignore the result of apply_change_group. */
6048 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
6049 {
6050 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
6051 apply_change_group ();
6052 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
6053 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
6054 }
6055 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
6056 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
6057 ;
6058 else
6059 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
6060 }
6061 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6062 {
6063 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
6064 and canon the address.
6065 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
6066 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
6067 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
6068 {
6069 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
6070 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
6071 }
6072 }
6073 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
6074 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
6075 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6076 canon_reg (y, NULL_RTX);
6077 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
6078 {
6079 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
6080 canon_reg. */
6081 canon_reg (y, insn);
6082 apply_change_group ();
6083 fold_rtx (y, insn);
6084 }
6085 }
6086 }
6087 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6088 {
6089 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
6090 {
6091 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
6092 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
6093 }
6094 }
6095
6096 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
6097 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
6098 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
6099 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6100 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
6101 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
6102 {
6103 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
6104 canon_reg (x, insn);
6105 apply_change_group ();
6106 fold_rtx (x, insn);
6107 }
6108
6109 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different, or if the DEST
6110 is a STRICT_LOW_PART. The latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV
6111 is handled specially for this case, and if it isn't set, then there will
6112 be no equivalence for the destinatation. */
6113 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
6114 && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0
6115 && (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6116 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
6117 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), NULL_RTX);
6118
6119 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
6120 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
6121 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
6122 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
6123 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
6124 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
6125
6126 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
6127 but we don't do this any more. */
6128
6129 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6130 {
6131 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6132 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6133 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
6134
6135 if ((GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
6136 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6137 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
6138 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)
6139 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 1);
6140 else
6141 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
6142
6143 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6144 {
6145 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
6146 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
6147 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
6148 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
6149 }
6150
6151 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6152 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6153 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6154 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6155
6156 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6157 canon_reg (dest, insn);
6158 }
6159
6160 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
6161 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
6162 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
6163 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
6164 occur often.
6165
6166 The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
6167
6168 apply_change_group ();
6169
6170 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
6171 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
6172 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
6173 in the rest of this function.
6174
6175 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
6176
6177 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6178 {
6179 register rtx src, dest;
6180 register rtx src_folded;
6181 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
6182 enum machine_mode mode;
6183 rtx src_eqv_here;
6184 rtx src_const = 0;
6185 rtx src_related = 0;
6186 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
6187 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6188 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
6189 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
6190 contents of src_folded before using it. */
6191 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
6192
6193 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6194 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6195
6196 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
6197 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
6198 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
6199
6200 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6201 sets[i].mode = mode;
6202
6203 if (src_eqv)
6204 {
6205 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
6206 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6207 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6208 do_not_record = 0;
6209 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6210 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6211 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
6212 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6213
6214 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
6215
6216 if (!do_not_record)
6217 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
6218
6219 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
6220 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6221 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6222 }
6223
6224 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
6225 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
6226 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
6227 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6228 src_eqv_here = 0;
6229 else
6230 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
6231
6232 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
6233 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
6234 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
6235
6236 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
6237 so we will be able to record it later. */
6238 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6239 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6240 {
6241 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6242
6243 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
6244 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6245 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6246 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6247 src_folded
6248 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
6249 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
6250 }
6251
6252 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
6253 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
6254 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
6255 do_not_record = 0;
6256 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6257 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6258
6259 sets[i].src = src;
6260 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
6261 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6262 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6263 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6264
6265 #if 0
6266 /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
6267 appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
6268 code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
6269 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
6270 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
6271 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
6272 in general. */
6273 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6274 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6275 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6276 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6277 #endif
6278
6279 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
6280 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
6281
6282 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
6283 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
6284 to a constant.
6285
6286 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
6287 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
6288 the same class; we check for this).
6289
6290 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
6291
6292 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
6293 REG_NOTE. */
6294
6295 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
6296 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
6297
6298 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
6299
6300 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
6301 {
6302 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
6303 {
6304 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
6305 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
6306 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
6307 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
6308 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
6309 }
6310
6311 src_eqv_here = 0;
6312 }
6313
6314 else if (src_eqv_elt)
6315 elt = src_eqv_elt;
6316
6317 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
6318 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
6319 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
6320 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash'). */
6321 if (elt)
6322 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6323 if (p->is_const)
6324 {
6325 src_const = p->exp;
6326 src_const_elt = elt;
6327 break;
6328 }
6329
6330 if (src_const == 0
6331 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
6332 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
6333 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
6334 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
6335 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
6336 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
6337 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
6338 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
6339 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
6340 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6341
6342 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
6343 hash code and look it up. */
6344 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
6345 {
6346 sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
6347 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
6348 }
6349
6350 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
6351 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
6352
6353 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
6354 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
6355 isn't, set ELT to it. */
6356 if (src_const_elt && elt
6357 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
6358 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
6359 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
6360 elt = src_const_elt;
6361
6362 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
6363 equivalent of SRC. */
6364 if (src_const
6365 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
6366 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
6367 {
6368 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
6369 if (src_related)
6370 {
6371 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
6372 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
6373 if (src_related_elt && elt)
6374 {
6375 if (elt->first_same_value
6376 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
6377 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
6378 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
6379 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
6380 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
6381
6382 src_related = 0;
6383 src_related_elt = 0;
6384 }
6385 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
6386 elt = src_related_elt;
6387 }
6388 }
6389
6390 /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
6391 wider mode. */
6392
6393 if (src_const && src_related == 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6394 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6395 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
6396 {
6397 enum machine_mode wider_mode;
6398
6399 for (wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6400 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
6401 && src_related == 0;
6402 wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode))
6403 {
6404 struct table_elt *const_elt
6405 = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
6406
6407 if (const_elt == 0)
6408 continue;
6409
6410 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
6411 const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
6412 if (GET_CODE (const_elt->exp) == REG)
6413 {
6414 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
6415 const_elt->exp);
6416 break;
6417 }
6418 }
6419 }
6420
6421 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
6422 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
6423 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
6424 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
6425 value. */
6426
6427 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
6428 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
6429 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
6430 {
6431 enum machine_mode tmode;
6432 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
6433
6434 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6435 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
6436 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
6437 {
6438 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
6439 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
6440
6441 if (inner)
6442 {
6443 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
6444 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
6445 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
6446 if (larger_elt == 0)
6447 continue;
6448
6449 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6450 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6451 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6452 {
6453 src_related
6454 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
6455 break;
6456 }
6457
6458 if (src_related)
6459 break;
6460 }
6461 }
6462 }
6463
6464 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
6465 /* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
6466 if it has, we can use a subreg of that. Many CISC machines
6467 also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
6468 beneficial these machines. */
6469
6470 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
6471 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
6472 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6473 && GET_CODE (src) == MEM && ! do_not_record
6474 && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode) != NIL)
6475 {
6476 enum machine_mode tmode;
6477
6478 /* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
6479 have been extended with. */
6480 PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode));
6481 XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
6482
6483 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6484 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
6485 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
6486 {
6487 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
6488
6489 PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
6490 larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
6491 HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
6492 if (larger_elt == 0)
6493 continue;
6494
6495 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6496 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6497 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6498 {
6499 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
6500 larger_elt->exp);
6501 break;
6502 }
6503
6504 if (src_related)
6505 break;
6506 }
6507 }
6508 #endif /* LOAD_EXTEND_OP */
6509
6510 if (src == src_folded)
6511 src_folded = 0;
6512
6513 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
6514 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
6515 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
6516 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
6517 already in the equivalence class.
6518
6519 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
6520 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
6521 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
6522 `src_related'. */
6523
6524 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
6525 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6526 {
6527 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
6528
6529 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
6530 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
6531 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
6532 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
6533 continue;
6534
6535 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
6536 src = 0;
6537 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
6538 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
6539 src_folded = 0;
6540 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
6541 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
6542 src_eqv_here = 0;
6543 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
6544 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
6545 src_related = 0;
6546
6547 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
6548 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
6549 then give it a negative cost. */
6550 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
6551 src_related = dest;
6552
6553 }
6554
6555 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
6556 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
6557 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
6558 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
6559 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
6560 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
6561 if (src)
6562 {
6563 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
6564 src_cost = -1;
6565 else
6566 src_cost = COST (src);
6567 }
6568
6569 if (src_eqv_here)
6570 {
6571 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
6572 src_eqv_cost = -1;
6573 else
6574 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
6575 }
6576
6577 if (src_folded)
6578 {
6579 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
6580 src_folded_cost = -1;
6581 else
6582 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
6583 }
6584
6585 if (src_related)
6586 {
6587 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
6588 src_related_cost = -1;
6589 else
6590 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
6591 }
6592
6593 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
6594 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
6595 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
6596 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
6597
6598 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
6599 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
6600 while (1)
6601 {
6602 rtx trial;
6603
6604 /* Skip invalid entries. */
6605 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6606 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6607 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6608
6609 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
6610
6611 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
6612 of equal cost, use this order:
6613 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
6614 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
6615 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6616 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
6617 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6618 {
6619 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6620 if (src_folded_force_flag)
6621 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
6622 }
6623 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6624 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
6625 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6626 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
6627 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
6628 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6629 trial = copy_rtx (src_eqv_here), src_eqv_cost = 10000;
6630 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6631 trial = copy_rtx (src_related), src_related_cost = 10000;
6632 else
6633 {
6634 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
6635 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6636 src_elt_cost = 10000;
6637 }
6638
6639 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
6640 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
6641 insn below.
6642
6643 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
6644 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
6645 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
6646 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
6647 the insn later. */
6648
6649 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
6650 && (trial == pc_rtx
6651 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
6652 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
6653 {
6654 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
6655 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
6656 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
6657 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
6658 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
6659 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
6660 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
6661 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
6662
6663 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
6664
6665 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
6666 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6667 break;
6668 }
6669
6670 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
6671 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
6672 {
6673 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
6674 canon_reg. */
6675
6676 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
6677 canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn),
6678 1);
6679 apply_change_group ();
6680 break;
6681 }
6682
6683 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
6684 constants and this is a constant, try making a
6685 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
6686 this since that is where it likely came from. */
6687
6688 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
6689 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
6690 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
6691 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
6692 {
6693 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
6694 src_folded = trial;
6695 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
6696 }
6697 }
6698
6699 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6700
6701 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
6702 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
6703 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
6704 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
6705 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
6706 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
6707 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6708 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6709 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
6710 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
6711 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
6712 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
6713 SET_SRC. */
6714 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
6715 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6716 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
6717 SRC is a hard register. */
6718 {
6719 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
6720
6721 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
6722 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
6723 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
6724
6725 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
6726 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
6727 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
6728 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
6729 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
6730 src = src_const;
6731 }
6732
6733 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
6734 if (src != sets[i].src)
6735 {
6736 do_not_record = 0;
6737 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6738 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6739 sets[i].src = src;
6740 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
6741 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6742 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6743 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6744 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
6745 }
6746
6747 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6748 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6749 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
6750 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
6751 won't help anything. */
6752 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6753 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6754 {
6755 tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
6756
6757 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6758 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6759 if (tem)
6760 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6761 else
6762 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6763 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6764
6765 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6766 previously held the constant value 0,
6767 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6768
6769 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6770 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6771 insn that set that register to zero.
6772
6773 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6774 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6775
6776 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6777 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6778 {
6779 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
6780 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
6781 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6782
6783 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6784 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6785 {
6786 if (note)
6787 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6788 else
6789 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6790 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6791 }
6792 }
6793 }
6794
6795 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6796 do_not_record = 0;
6797 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6798
6799 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6800 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6801 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6802 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6803 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6804 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6805 {
6806 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6807 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6808 }
6809
6810 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6811
6812 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6813 {
6814 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6815
6816 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6817 or just things at non-fixed places.
6818 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6819 because we don't know how long it is. */
6820 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6821 }
6822
6823 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6824 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6825 since the register values used in the address computation
6826 are those before this instruction. */
6827 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
6828
6829 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6830 because the value in it after the store
6831 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6832
6833 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6834 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6835 {
6836 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6837
6838 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6839 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6840 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6841 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
6842 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6843 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6844 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6845 ;
6846 else
6847 {
6848 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6849 but no new value will be recorded.
6850 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6851 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6852 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6853 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6854 src_eqv = 0;
6855 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6856 }
6857 }
6858
6859 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6860 the insn. */
6861 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6862 {
6863 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6864 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6865 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6866 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6867 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6868 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6869 /* No more processing for this set. */
6870 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6871 }
6872
6873 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6874 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6875 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6876 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6877 {
6878 rtx p;
6879
6880 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6881 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6882 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6883 {
6884 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6885 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6886 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6887 delete_insn (insn);
6888 insn = new;
6889 }
6890 else
6891 /* Otherwise, force rerecognition, since it probably had
6892 a different pattern before.
6893 This shouldn't really be necessary, since whatever
6894 changed the source value above should have done this.
6895 Until the right place is found, might as well do this here. */
6896 INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
6897
6898 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6899 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6900 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6901 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6902 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6903
6904 p = insn;
6905
6906 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6907 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6908 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6909 {
6910 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6911 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6912 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6913 else
6914 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6915 }
6916
6917 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6918 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6919 BARRIER. */
6920
6921 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6922 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6923 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6924
6925 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6926 one if so. */
6927
6928 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6929 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
6930 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6931
6932 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6933 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6934 }
6935
6936 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6937 processing for this assignment. */
6938
6939 else if (do_not_record)
6940 {
6941 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6942 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6943 invalidate (dest);
6944 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6945 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6946 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
6947 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6948 }
6949
6950 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6951 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6952
6953 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
6954 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6955 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6956 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6957 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6958 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6959 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6960 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6961 {
6962 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6963 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6964 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
6965 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6966 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6967 }
6968 #endif
6969 }
6970
6971 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6972 if they are not already present.
6973 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6974 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6975 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6976 (having been invalidated). */
6977
6978 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6979 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6980 {
6981 register struct table_elt *elt;
6982 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6983 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6984 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6985
6986 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6987 {
6988 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6989 classp = 0;
6990 }
6991 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6992 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6993 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
6994 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6995 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6996 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6997
6998 /* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
6999 does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
7000 to src_eqv_elt. */
7001 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7002 if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
7003 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
7004 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
7005 }
7006
7007 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7008 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
7009 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
7010 {
7011 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
7012 {
7013 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
7014 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
7015 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
7016 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
7017 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
7018 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
7019 sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
7020 }
7021 else
7022 {
7023 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
7024 already present. */
7025 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
7026 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
7027 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
7028 enum machine_mode mode
7029 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
7030
7031 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
7032 {
7033 register struct table_elt *elt;
7034
7035 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
7036 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
7037 match if not still valid. */
7038 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
7039 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
7040 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
7041 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
7042 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
7043 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
7044 }
7045
7046 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
7047 && src != sets[i].src_const
7048 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
7049 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
7050 sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
7051 }
7052 }
7053 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
7054 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
7055 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
7056 so that the destination goes into that class. */
7057 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
7058
7059 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
7060
7061 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
7062 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
7063
7064 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7065 {
7066 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7067
7068 if (! CONST_CALL_P (insn))
7069 invalidate_memory (&everything);
7070 invalidate_for_call ();
7071 }
7072
7073 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
7074 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
7075 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
7076 a part of which is being set. */
7077
7078 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7079 if (sets[i].rtl)
7080 {
7081 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
7082
7083 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
7084 previous quantity's chain.
7085 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
7086 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
7087 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7088 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7089 invalidate (dest);
7090 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7091 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7092 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
7093 }
7094
7095 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
7096 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
7097 This removes from the hash table
7098 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
7099
7100 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
7101 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
7102
7103 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7104 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
7105 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
7106
7107 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
7108 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
7109
7110 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7111 if (sets[i].rtl)
7112 {
7113 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
7114 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
7115 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
7116 {
7117 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
7118
7119 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
7120 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
7121
7122 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
7123 elt = elt->next_same_value;
7124 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
7125 }
7126 }
7127
7128 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
7129
7130 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7131 if (sets[i].rtl)
7132 {
7133 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
7134 register struct table_elt *elt;
7135
7136 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
7137 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
7138 memory. */
7139 if ((flag_float_store
7140 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
7141 && FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
7142 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
7143 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
7144 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
7145 here. */
7146 || in_libcall_block
7147 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
7148 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
7149 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
7150 continue;
7151
7152 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
7153 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
7154 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
7155 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
7156 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
7157
7158 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
7159 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
7160 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
7161 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
7162 recalculated. */
7163 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
7164
7165 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
7166 sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
7167 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
7168 if (elt->in_memory)
7169 {
7170 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
7171 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
7172 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
7173 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
7174 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
7175 }
7176
7177 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
7178 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
7179 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
7180 make that equivalence as well.
7181
7182 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
7183 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
7184 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
7185 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
7186 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
7187 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
7188
7189 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
7190 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
7191
7192 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7193 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) - 1)
7194 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7195 == (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) - 1)/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
7196 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
7197 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
7198 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
7199 {
7200 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
7201 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
7202
7203 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
7204 elt = elt->next_same_value)
7205 {
7206 rtx new_src = 0;
7207 unsigned src_hash;
7208 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7209
7210 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
7211 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
7212 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
7213 continue;
7214
7215 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
7216 if (new_src == 0)
7217 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
7218
7219 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
7220 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
7221
7222 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
7223 already. */
7224 if (src_elt == 0)
7225 {
7226 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
7227 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
7228 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
7229 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
7230 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
7231 }
7232 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
7233 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
7234 actually the same. */
7235 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
7236
7237 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
7238 }
7239 }
7240 }
7241
7242 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
7243 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
7244 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
7245 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
7246 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
7247 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
7248 for later optimizations.
7249
7250 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
7251 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
7252 into a three-operand insn.
7253
7254 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
7255
7256 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
7257 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
7258 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
7259 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7260 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
7261 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
7262 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
7263 {
7264 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
7265 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
7266 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
7267
7268 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
7269 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
7270 {
7271 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
7272 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX);
7273
7274 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
7275 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
7276 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
7277 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
7278 apply_change_group ();
7279
7280 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
7281 if (note)
7282 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
7283
7284 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
7285 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
7286 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7287 if (note)
7288 remove_note (prev, note);
7289
7290 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7291 if (note)
7292 {
7293 remove_note (insn, note);
7294 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
7295 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
7296 }
7297 }
7298 }
7299
7300 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
7301 the condition being tested. */
7302
7303 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
7304 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
7305 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
7306 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
7307 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
7308
7309 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7310 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
7311 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
7312 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
7313 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
7314 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
7315 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
7316 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
7317 {
7318 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
7319 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
7320 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
7321 }
7322
7323 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
7324 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
7325 #endif
7326
7327 prev_insn = insn;
7328 }
7329 \f
7330 /* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
7331 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
7332 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
7333
7334 static void
7335 note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
7336 rtx written;
7337 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
7338 {
7339 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7340
7341 if (written == 0)
7342 *writes_ptr = everything;
7343 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
7344 {
7345 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
7346 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
7347 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
7348 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
7349 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
7350 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
7351 {
7352 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
7353 return;
7354 }
7355 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
7356 *writes_ptr = everything;
7357 /* (mem (scratch)) means clobber everything. */
7358 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == SCRATCH)
7359 *writes_ptr = everything;
7360 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
7361 {
7362 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
7363 and that's just as good as a structure element
7364 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables.
7365 However, we must allow QImode aliasing of scalars, because the
7366 ANSI C standard allows character pointers to alias anything. */
7367 if (! ((MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
7368 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS)
7369 && GET_MODE (written) != QImode))
7370 writes_ptr->all = 1;
7371 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
7372 }
7373 writes_ptr->var = 1;
7374 }
7375 }
7376
7377 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
7378 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
7379 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
7380 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
7381
7382 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
7383 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
7384 X is the pattern of the insn. */
7385
7386 static void
7387 invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
7388 struct write_data *w;
7389 rtx x;
7390 {
7391 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
7392 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
7393 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
7394 if (w->var)
7395 invalidate_memory (w);
7396
7397 if (w->sp)
7398 {
7399 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
7400 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
7401
7402 /* This should be *very* rare. */
7403 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
7404 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
7405 }
7406
7407 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
7408 {
7409 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
7410 if (ref)
7411 {
7412 if (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7413 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all))
7414 invalidate (ref);
7415 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7416 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7417 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0));
7418 }
7419 }
7420 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
7421 {
7422 register int i;
7423 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7424 {
7425 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
7426 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
7427 {
7428 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
7429 if (ref)
7430 {
7431 if (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7432 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all))
7433 invalidate (ref);
7434 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7435 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7436 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0));
7437 }
7438 }
7439 }
7440 }
7441 }
7442 \f
7443 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
7444 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
7445 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
7446 only do this if the address remains valid.
7447
7448 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
7449
7450 Return the replacement for X. */
7451
7452 static rtx
7453 cse_process_notes (x, object)
7454 rtx x;
7455 rtx object;
7456 {
7457 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7458 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7459 int i;
7460
7461 switch (code)
7462 {
7463 case CONST_INT:
7464 case CONST:
7465 case SYMBOL_REF:
7466 case LABEL_REF:
7467 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7468 case PC:
7469 case CC0:
7470 case LO_SUM:
7471 return x;
7472
7473 case MEM:
7474 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
7475 return x;
7476
7477 case EXPR_LIST:
7478 case INSN_LIST:
7479 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7480 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7481 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7482 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX);
7483 return x;
7484
7485 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7486 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7487 {
7488 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
7489 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
7490 since they would impede folding. */
7491 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
7492 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
7493 return x;
7494 }
7495
7496 case REG:
7497 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
7498
7499 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
7500 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
7501 && qty_const[i] != 0
7502 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
7503 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
7504 {
7505 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
7506 if (new)
7507 return new;
7508 }
7509
7510 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
7511 return canon_reg (x, NULL_RTX);
7512 }
7513
7514 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
7515 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7516 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
7517 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
7518
7519 return x;
7520 }
7521 \f
7522 /* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
7523 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
7524
7525 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
7526 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
7527 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
7528 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
7529 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
7530
7531 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
7532 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
7533 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
7534 jumps to a label used only once. */
7535
7536 static void
7537 cse_around_loop (loop_start)
7538 rtx loop_start;
7539 {
7540 rtx insn;
7541 int i;
7542 struct table_elt *p;
7543
7544 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
7545 do anything. */
7546 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
7547 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
7548 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7549 ;
7550
7551 if (insn == 0
7552 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7553 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
7554 return;
7555
7556 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
7557 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
7558 the loop. Any equivalences resulting from that comparison are
7559 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
7560 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
7561 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
7562 p = p->next_same_value)
7563 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
7564 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
7565 invalidate (p->exp);
7566 else if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7567 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7568 invalidate (XEXP (p->exp, 0));
7569
7570 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
7571 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
7572
7573 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
7574 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
7575 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
7576
7577 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
7578 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
7579 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
7580 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
7581 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7582 {
7583 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7584 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
7585 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
7586 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
7587 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7588 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7589 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7590 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
7591 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
7592 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
7593 loop_start);
7594 }
7595 }
7596 \f
7597 /* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
7598
7599 static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
7600
7601 /* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
7602 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
7603
7604 static void
7605 invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
7606 rtx set;
7607 rtx dest;
7608 {
7609 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
7610 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7611 || dest == cc0_rtx
7612 #endif
7613 || dest == pc_rtx)
7614 return;
7615
7616 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
7617 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
7618
7619 /* There are times when an address can appear varying and be a PLUS
7620 during this scan when it would be a fixed address were we to know
7621 the proper equivalences. So promote "nonscalar" to be "all". */
7622 if (skipped_writes_memory.nonscalar)
7623 skipped_writes_memory.all = 1;
7624
7625 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7626 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7627 invalidate (dest);
7628 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7629 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7630 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
7631 }
7632
7633 /* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
7634 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
7635 conditionally executed. */
7636
7637 static void
7638 invalidate_skipped_block (start)
7639 rtx start;
7640 {
7641 rtx insn;
7642 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7643 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7644
7645 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
7646 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7647 {
7648 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
7649 continue;
7650
7651 skipped_writes_memory = init;
7652
7653 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7654 {
7655 invalidate_for_call ();
7656 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
7657 }
7658
7659 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
7660 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
7661 }
7662 }
7663 \f
7664 /* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
7665 value to be checked for modification. */
7666
7667 static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
7668
7669 /* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
7670 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
7671
7672 static void
7673 cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
7674 rtx x;
7675 rtx set;
7676 {
7677 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
7678 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
7679 return;
7680
7681 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
7682 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
7683 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
7684 }
7685
7686 /* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
7687 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
7688
7689 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
7690 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
7691 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
7692
7693 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
7694 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
7695 retains its value at the start of the loop.
7696
7697 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
7698 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
7699 register.
7700
7701 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
7702
7703 static void
7704 cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
7705 rtx x;
7706 rtx insn;
7707 rtx loop_start;
7708 {
7709 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7710 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7711 struct write_data writes_memory;
7712
7713 writes_memory = init;
7714
7715 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
7716 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
7717 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
7718 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
7719 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
7720 {
7721 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
7722 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
7723 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
7724
7725 if (src_elt)
7726 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
7727 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
7728 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
7729 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
7730 {
7731 rtx p, set;
7732
7733 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
7734 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
7735 a label or CALL_INSN. */
7736
7737 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
7738 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
7739 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
7740 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
7741 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
7742 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
7743 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
7744 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
7745 {
7746 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
7747 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
7748 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
7749 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
7750 the hash table. */
7751 rtx q;
7752
7753 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
7754 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
7755 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
7756 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
7757
7758 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
7759 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
7760 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
7761 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
7762 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
7763 src_elt->exp, 0))
7764 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
7765 SET_DEST (set)),
7766 p);
7767 break;
7768 }
7769 }
7770 }
7771
7772 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
7773 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
7774
7775 if (writes_memory.var)
7776 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
7777
7778 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
7779 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7780 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
7781 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
7782 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
7783 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7784 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7785 invalidate (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0));
7786 }
7787 \f
7788 /* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
7789 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
7790 block, and the branch path.
7791
7792 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
7793 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
7794 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
7795 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7796
7797 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
7798 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
7799 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7800 to construct the output branch path. */
7801
7802 void
7803 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7804 rtx insn;
7805 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7806 int follow_jumps;
7807 int after_loop;
7808 int skip_blocks;
7809 {
7810 rtx p = insn, q;
7811 int nsets = 0;
7812 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
7813 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7814 int path_size = data->path_size;
7815 int path_entry = 0;
7816 int i;
7817
7818 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7819 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7820 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7821 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7822 while (path_size > 0)
7823 {
7824 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7825 {
7826 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7827 break;
7828 }
7829 else
7830 path_size--;
7831 }
7832
7833 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7834 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7835 {
7836 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7837 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7838 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7839 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7840 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7841 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7842 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7843 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7844 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7845
7846 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7847 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7848
7849 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7850 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7851 break;
7852
7853 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7854 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7855 a later time than the setjmp. */
7856 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7857 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7858 break;
7859
7860 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7861 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7862 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7863 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7864 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7865 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7866 nsets += 1;
7867
7868 /* Ignore insns made by CSE; they cannot affect the boundaries of
7869 the basic block. */
7870
7871 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
7872 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7873 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
7874 low_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7875
7876 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7877 take it, do so. */
7878 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7879 {
7880 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7881 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7882
7883 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7884 path_entry++;
7885 }
7886
7887 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7888 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7889 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
7890 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7891
7892 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7893 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7894 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7895 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7896
7897 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7898 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7899 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7900 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7901 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7902 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7903 {
7904 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7905 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7906 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7907 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7908 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7909 break;
7910
7911 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7912 basic block when the branch is taken. */
7913 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7914 {
7915 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7916 always-executed loop. */
7917 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7918 {
7919 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7920 continue;
7921 }
7922
7923 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7924 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7925 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7926 break;
7927
7928 if (i != path_entry)
7929 break;
7930
7931 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7932 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7933
7934 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7935 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7936 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7937 turned into a no-op). */
7938 path_size = path_entry;
7939
7940 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7941 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7942 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7943 }
7944 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7945 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7946 {
7947 register rtx tmp;
7948
7949 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7950 {
7951 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7952 continue;
7953 }
7954
7955 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7956 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7957 break;
7958
7959 if (i != path_entry)
7960 break;
7961
7962 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7963 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7964 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7965 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7966 break;
7967
7968 if (tmp == q)
7969 {
7970 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7971 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7972
7973 path_size = path_entry;
7974
7975 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7976 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7977 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7978 }
7979 }
7980 }
7981 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7982 }
7983
7984 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7985 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7986 data->nsets = nsets;
7987 data->last = p;
7988
7989 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7990 so a rescan won't be done. */
7991 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7992 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7993 break;
7994
7995 if (i == -1)
7996 data->path_size = 0;
7997 else
7998 data->path_size = path_size;
7999
8000 /* End the current branch path. */
8001 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
8002 }
8003 \f
8004 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
8005 F is the first instruction.
8006 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
8007
8008 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
8009 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
8010
8011 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
8012 in conditional jump instructions. */
8013
8014 int
8015 cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
8016 rtx f;
8017 int nregs;
8018 int after_loop;
8019 FILE *file;
8020 {
8021 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
8022 register rtx insn = f;
8023 register int i;
8024
8025 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
8026 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
8027 val.path_size = 0;
8028
8029 init_recog ();
8030
8031 max_reg = nregs;
8032
8033 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8034 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8035
8036 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
8037 {
8038 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
8039 consec_ints[i] = i;
8040 }
8041
8042 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8043 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8044 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8045 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8046 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
8047
8048 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
8049
8050 /* Allocate scratch rtl here. cse_insn will fill in the memory reference
8051 and change the code and mode as appropriate. */
8052 memory_extend_rtx = gen_rtx (ZERO_EXTEND, VOIDmode, 0);
8053 #endif
8054
8055 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
8056 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
8057 bzero ((char *) table, sizeof table);
8058 free_element_chain = 0;
8059 n_elements_made = 0;
8060
8061 /* Find the largest uid. */
8062
8063 max_uid = get_max_uid ();
8064 uid_cuid = (int *) alloca ((max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
8065 bzero ((char *) uid_cuid, (max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
8066
8067 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
8068 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
8069 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
8070 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
8071 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
8072
8073 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
8074 {
8075 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
8076 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
8077 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
8078 else
8079 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
8080 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
8081 }
8082
8083 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
8084
8085 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
8086
8087 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
8088 if ((call_used_regs[i]
8089 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
8090 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
8091 confused if they can "live across calls".
8092
8093 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
8094 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
8095 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
8096 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
8097 table register is preserved across calls. */
8098
8099 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
8100 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8101 #if HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8102 && i != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8103 #endif
8104 #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8105 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
8106 #endif
8107 #if defined (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM) && !defined (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED)
8108 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
8109 #endif
8110 )
8111 || global_regs[i])
8112 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
8113
8114 /* Loop over basic blocks.
8115 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
8116 (which is 2 for each SET). */
8117 insn = f;
8118 while (insn)
8119 {
8120 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
8121 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
8122
8123 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
8124 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
8125 {
8126 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
8127 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
8128 val.path_size = 0;
8129 continue;
8130 }
8131
8132 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
8133 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
8134 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
8135
8136 if (file)
8137 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
8138 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
8139 val.nsets);
8140
8141 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
8142 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
8143 if (max_qty < 500)
8144 max_qty = 500;
8145
8146 max_qty += max_reg;
8147
8148 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
8149 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
8150 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
8151 if (val.path_size > 0)
8152 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
8153 else
8154 {
8155 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
8156 rtx temp;
8157
8158 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
8159 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
8160 us a new branch path to investigate. */
8161 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
8162 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
8163 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
8164 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
8165 insn = temp;
8166
8167 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
8168 }
8169
8170 #ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
8171 alloca (0);
8172 #endif
8173 }
8174
8175 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
8176 qty_const = 0;
8177
8178 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
8179 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
8180
8181 return cse_jumps_altered;
8182 }
8183
8184 /* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
8185 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
8186 a null path when not following jumps.
8187
8188 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
8189 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
8190 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
8191
8192 static rtx
8193 cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
8194 register rtx from, to;
8195 struct branch_path *next_branch;
8196 int around_loop;
8197 {
8198 register rtx insn;
8199 int to_usage = 0;
8200 int in_libcall_block = 0;
8201
8202 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
8203 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
8204
8205 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8206 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8207 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
8208 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8209 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8210 qty_comparison_code
8211 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
8212 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8213 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8214
8215 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
8216 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
8217 qty_mode -= max_reg;
8218 qty_const -= max_reg;
8219 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
8220 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
8221 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
8222 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
8223
8224 new_basic_block ();
8225
8226 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
8227 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
8228 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
8229
8230 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
8231 {
8232 register enum rtx_code code;
8233
8234 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
8235 to be taken, do so. */
8236 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
8237 {
8238 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
8239 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
8240 {
8241 if (status == TAKEN)
8242 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
8243 else
8244 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
8245
8246 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
8247 Then follow this branch. */
8248 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
8249 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
8250 #endif
8251 prev_insn = insn;
8252 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
8253 continue;
8254 }
8255 }
8256
8257 code = GET_CODE (insn);
8258 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
8259 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
8260
8261 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
8262 {
8263 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
8264 looking for duplicate operations. */
8265
8266 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
8267 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), NULL_RTX);
8268
8269 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
8270 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
8271 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
8272 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
8273 recorded. */
8274
8275 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
8276 in_libcall_block = 1;
8277 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
8278 in_libcall_block = 0;
8279
8280 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
8281 }
8282
8283 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
8284 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
8285 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
8286 that we can have one usage of TO. */
8287
8288 if (simplejump_p (insn))
8289 {
8290 if (to == 0)
8291 return 0;
8292
8293 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
8294 to_usage = 1;
8295
8296 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
8297 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
8298 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
8299 to whatever follows this insn,
8300 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
8301 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
8302 break;
8303
8304 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
8305 }
8306
8307 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
8308 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
8309 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
8310 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
8311 want to count the use in that jump. */
8312
8313 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
8314 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
8315 {
8316 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
8317
8318 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
8319
8320 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
8321 delete_insn (to);
8322
8323 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
8324 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
8325 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
8326 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
8327 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
8328 has no continuation. */
8329
8330 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
8331 return 0;
8332
8333 to_usage = 0;
8334 val.path_size = 0;
8335 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
8336
8337 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
8338 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
8339 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
8340 and that block will be scanned individually. */
8341 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
8342 break;
8343
8344 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
8345 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
8346 to = val.last;
8347
8348 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
8349 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
8350 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
8351
8352 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
8353 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
8354 }
8355 }
8356
8357 if (next_qty > max_qty)
8358 abort ();
8359
8360 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
8361 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
8362 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
8363 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
8364
8365 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
8366 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
8367 && around_loop && to != 0
8368 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
8369 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
8370 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
8371 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
8372 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
8373
8374 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
8375 }
8376 \f
8377 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
8378 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
8379 we count each register usage.
8380
8381 Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
8382 contains X in its SET_SRC. This is because such a SET does not
8383 modify the liveness of DEST. */
8384
8385 static void
8386 count_reg_usage (x, counts, dest, incr)
8387 rtx x;
8388 int *counts;
8389 rtx dest;
8390 int incr;
8391 {
8392 enum rtx_code code;
8393 char *fmt;
8394 int i, j;
8395
8396 if (x == 0)
8397 return;
8398
8399 switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
8400 {
8401 case REG:
8402 if (x != dest)
8403 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
8404 return;
8405
8406 case PC:
8407 case CC0:
8408 case CONST:
8409 case CONST_INT:
8410 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8411 case SYMBOL_REF:
8412 case LABEL_REF:
8413 case CLOBBER:
8414 return;
8415
8416 case SET:
8417 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
8418 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
8419 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8420
8421 /* If SRC has side-effects, then we can't delete this insn, so the
8422 usage of SET_DEST inside SRC counts.
8423
8424 ??? Strictly-speaking, we might be preserving this insn
8425 because some other SET has side-effects, but that's hard
8426 to do and can't happen now. */
8427 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
8428 side_effects_p (SET_SRC (x)) ? NULL_RTX : SET_DEST (x),
8429 incr);
8430 return;
8431
8432 case CALL_INSN:
8433 count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8434
8435 /* ... falls through ... */
8436 case INSN:
8437 case JUMP_INSN:
8438 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8439
8440 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
8441 use them. */
8442
8443 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8444 return;
8445
8446 case EXPR_LIST:
8447 case INSN_LIST:
8448 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
8449 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
8450 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8451 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8452 return;
8453 }
8454
8455 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8456 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8457 {
8458 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8459 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
8460 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8461 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
8462 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
8463 }
8464 }
8465 \f
8466 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
8467 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
8468
8469 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
8470 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
8471 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
8472 are also sped up. */
8473
8474 void
8475 delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
8476 rtx insns;
8477 int nreg;
8478 {
8479 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
8480 rtx insn, prev;
8481 rtx tem;
8482 int i;
8483 int in_libcall = 0;
8484
8485 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
8486 bzero ((char *) counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
8487 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
8488 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
8489
8490 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
8491 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
8492 usage counts for registers it uses. */
8493 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ()); insn; insn = prev)
8494 {
8495 int live_insn = 0;
8496
8497 prev = prev_real_insn (insn);
8498
8499 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
8500 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. Remember
8501 that we are scanning backwards. */
8502 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
8503 in_libcall = 1;
8504
8505 if (in_libcall)
8506 live_insn = 1;
8507 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
8508 {
8509 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
8510 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8511 ;
8512
8513 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
8514 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
8515 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8516 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8517 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8518 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8519 ;
8520 #endif
8521 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
8522 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8523 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
8524 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
8525 live_insn = 1;
8526 }
8527 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
8528 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8529 {
8530 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
8531
8532 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
8533 {
8534 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
8535 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
8536 ;
8537
8538 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
8539 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
8540 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
8541 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8542 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8543 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8544 ;
8545 #endif
8546 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
8547 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8548 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
8549 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
8550 live_insn = 1;
8551 }
8552 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
8553 live_insn = 1;
8554 }
8555 else
8556 live_insn = 1;
8557
8558 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
8559 being used. */
8560
8561 if (! live_insn)
8562 {
8563 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
8564 delete_insn (insn);
8565 }
8566
8567 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
8568 in_libcall = 0;
8569 }
8570 }